summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/IEEEtran.cls
blob: 8d2b1c6478f81e0e2f65cb62debabbf236fb0304 (plain)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
991
992
993
994
995
996
997
998
999
1000
1001
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
1007
1008
1009
1010
1011
1012
1013
1014
1015
1016
1017
1018
1019
1020
1021
1022
1023
1024
1025
1026
1027
1028
1029
1030
1031
1032
1033
1034
1035
1036
1037
1038
1039
1040
1041
1042
1043
1044
1045
1046
1047
1048
1049
1050
1051
1052
1053
1054
1055
1056
1057
1058
1059
1060
1061
1062
1063
1064
1065
1066
1067
1068
1069
1070
1071
1072
1073
1074
1075
1076
1077
1078
1079
1080
1081
1082
1083
1084
1085
1086
1087
1088
1089
1090
1091
1092
1093
1094
1095
1096
1097
1098
1099
1100
1101
1102
1103
1104
1105
1106
1107
1108
1109
1110
1111
1112
1113
1114
1115
1116
1117
1118
1119
1120
1121
1122
1123
1124
1125
1126
1127
1128
1129
1130
1131
1132
1133
1134
1135
1136
1137
1138
1139
1140
1141
1142
1143
1144
1145
1146
1147
1148
1149
1150
1151
1152
1153
1154
1155
1156
1157
1158
1159
1160
1161
1162
1163
1164
1165
1166
1167
1168
1169
1170
1171
1172
1173
1174
1175
1176
1177
1178
1179
1180
1181
1182
1183
1184
1185
1186
1187
1188
1189
1190
1191
1192
1193
1194
1195
1196
1197
1198
1199
1200
1201
1202
1203
1204
1205
1206
1207
1208
1209
1210
1211
1212
1213
1214
1215
1216
1217
1218
1219
1220
1221
1222
1223
1224
1225
1226
1227
1228
1229
1230
1231
1232
1233
1234
1235
1236
1237
1238
1239
1240
1241
1242
1243
1244
1245
1246
1247
1248
1249
1250
1251
1252
1253
1254
1255
1256
1257
1258
1259
1260
1261
1262
1263
1264
1265
1266
1267
1268
1269
1270
1271
1272
1273
1274
1275
1276
1277
1278
1279
1280
1281
1282
1283
1284
1285
1286
1287
1288
1289
1290
1291
1292
1293
1294
1295
1296
1297
1298
1299
1300
1301
1302
1303
1304
1305
1306
1307
1308
1309
1310
1311
1312
1313
1314
1315
1316
1317
1318
1319
1320
1321
1322
1323
1324
1325
1326
1327
1328
1329
1330
1331
1332
1333
1334
1335
1336
1337
1338
1339
1340
1341
1342
1343
1344
1345
1346
1347
1348
1349
1350
1351
1352
1353
1354
1355
1356
1357
1358
1359
1360
1361
1362
1363
1364
1365
1366
1367
1368
1369
1370
1371
1372
1373
1374
1375
1376
1377
1378
1379
1380
1381
1382
1383
1384
1385
1386
1387
1388
1389
1390
1391
1392
1393
1394
1395
1396
1397
1398
1399
1400
1401
1402
1403
1404
1405
1406
1407
1408
1409
1410
1411
1412
1413
1414
1415
1416
1417
1418
1419
1420
1421
1422
1423
1424
1425
1426
1427
1428
1429
1430
1431
1432
1433
1434
1435
1436
1437
1438
1439
1440
1441
1442
1443
1444
1445
1446
1447
1448
1449
1450
1451
1452
1453
1454
1455
1456
1457
1458
1459
1460
1461
1462
1463
1464
1465
1466
1467
1468
1469
1470
1471
1472
1473
1474
1475
1476
1477
1478
1479
1480
1481
1482
1483
1484
1485
1486
1487
1488
1489
1490
1491
1492
1493
1494
1495
1496
1497
1498
1499
1500
1501
1502
1503
1504
1505
1506
1507
1508
1509
1510
1511
1512
1513
1514
1515
1516
1517
1518
1519
1520
1521
1522
1523
1524
1525
1526
1527
1528
1529
1530
1531
1532
1533
1534
1535
1536
1537
1538
1539
1540
1541
1542
1543
1544
1545
1546
1547
1548
1549
1550
1551
1552
1553
1554
1555
1556
1557
1558
1559
1560
1561
1562
1563
1564
1565
1566
1567
1568
1569
1570
1571
1572
1573
1574
1575
1576
1577
1578
1579
1580
1581
1582
1583
1584
1585
1586
1587
1588
1589
1590
1591
1592
1593
1594
1595
1596
1597
1598
1599
1600
1601
1602
1603
1604
1605
1606
1607
1608
1609
1610
1611
1612
1613
1614
1615
1616
1617
1618
1619
1620
1621
1622
1623
1624
1625
1626
1627
1628
1629
1630
1631
1632
1633
1634
1635
1636
1637
1638
1639
1640
1641
1642
1643
1644
1645
1646
1647
1648
1649
1650
1651
1652
1653
1654
1655
1656
1657
1658
1659
1660
1661
1662
1663
1664
1665
1666
1667
1668
1669
1670
1671
1672
1673
1674
1675
1676
1677
1678
1679
1680
1681
1682
1683
1684
1685
1686
1687
1688
1689
1690
1691
1692
1693
1694
1695
1696
1697
1698
1699
1700
1701
1702
1703
1704
1705
1706
1707
1708
1709
1710
1711
1712
1713
1714
1715
1716
1717
1718
1719
1720
1721
1722
1723
1724
1725
1726
1727
1728
1729
1730
1731
1732
1733
1734
1735
1736
1737
1738
1739
1740
1741
1742
1743
1744
1745
1746
1747
1748
1749
1750
1751
1752
1753
1754
1755
1756
1757
1758
1759
1760
1761
1762
1763
1764
1765
1766
1767
1768
1769
1770
1771
1772
1773
1774
1775
1776
1777
1778
1779
1780
1781
1782
1783
1784
1785
1786
1787
1788
1789
1790
1791
1792
1793
1794
1795
1796
1797
1798
1799
1800
1801
1802
1803
1804
1805
1806
1807
1808
1809
1810
1811
1812
1813
1814
1815
1816
1817
1818
1819
1820
1821
1822
1823
1824
1825
1826
1827
1828
1829
1830
1831
1832
1833
1834
1835
1836
1837
1838
1839
1840
1841
1842
1843
1844
1845
1846
1847
1848
1849
1850
1851
1852
1853
1854
1855
1856
1857
1858
1859
1860
1861
1862
1863
1864
1865
1866
1867
1868
1869
1870
1871
1872
1873
1874
1875
1876
1877
1878
1879
1880
1881
1882
1883
1884
1885
1886
1887
1888
1889
1890
1891
1892
1893
1894
1895
1896
1897
1898
1899
1900
1901
1902
1903
1904
1905
1906
1907
1908
1909
1910
1911
1912
1913
1914
1915
1916
1917
1918
1919
1920
1921
1922
1923
1924
1925
1926
1927
1928
1929
1930
1931
1932
1933
1934
1935
1936
1937
1938
1939
1940
1941
1942
1943
1944
1945
1946
1947
1948
1949
1950
1951
1952
1953
1954
1955
1956
1957
1958
1959
1960
1961
1962
1963
1964
1965
1966
1967
1968
1969
1970
1971
1972
1973
1974
1975
1976
1977
1978
1979
1980
1981
1982
1983
1984
1985
1986
1987
1988
1989
1990
1991
1992
1993
1994
1995
1996
1997
1998
1999
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
2010
2011
2012
2013
2014
2015
2016
2017
2018
2019
2020
2021
2022
2023
2024
2025
2026
2027
2028
2029
2030
2031
2032
2033
2034
2035
2036
2037
2038
2039
2040
2041
2042
2043
2044
2045
2046
2047
2048
2049
2050
2051
2052
2053
2054
2055
2056
2057
2058
2059
2060
2061
2062
2063
2064
2065
2066
2067
2068
2069
2070
2071
2072
2073
2074
2075
2076
2077
2078
2079
2080
2081
2082
2083
2084
2085
2086
2087
2088
2089
2090
2091
2092
2093
2094
2095
2096
2097
2098
2099
2100
2101
2102
2103
2104
2105
2106
2107
2108
2109
2110
2111
2112
2113
2114
2115
2116
2117
2118
2119
2120
2121
2122
2123
2124
2125
2126
2127
2128
2129
2130
2131
2132
2133
2134
2135
2136
2137
2138
2139
2140
2141
2142
2143
2144
2145
2146
2147
2148
2149
2150
2151
2152
2153
2154
2155
2156
2157
2158
2159
2160
2161
2162
2163
2164
2165
2166
2167
2168
2169
2170
2171
2172
2173
2174
2175
2176
2177
2178
2179
2180
2181
2182
2183
2184
2185
2186
2187
2188
2189
2190
2191
2192
2193
2194
2195
2196
2197
2198
2199
2200
2201
2202
2203
2204
2205
2206
2207
2208
2209
2210
2211
2212
2213
2214
2215
2216
2217
2218
2219
2220
2221
2222
2223
2224
2225
2226
2227
2228
2229
2230
2231
2232
2233
2234
2235
2236
2237
2238
2239
2240
2241
2242
2243
2244
2245
2246
2247
2248
2249
2250
2251
2252
2253
2254
2255
2256
2257
2258
2259
2260
2261
2262
2263
2264
2265
2266
2267
2268
2269
2270
2271
2272
2273
2274
2275
2276
2277
2278
2279
2280
2281
2282
2283
2284
2285
2286
2287
2288
2289
2290
2291
2292
2293
2294
2295
2296
2297
2298
2299
2300
2301
2302
2303
2304
2305
2306
2307
2308
2309
2310
2311
2312
2313
2314
2315
2316
2317
2318
2319
2320
2321
2322
2323
2324
2325
2326
2327
2328
2329
2330
2331
2332
2333
2334
2335
2336
2337
2338
2339
2340
2341
2342
2343
2344
2345
2346
2347
2348
2349
2350
2351
2352
2353
2354
2355
2356
2357
2358
2359
2360
2361
2362
2363
2364
2365
2366
2367
2368
2369
2370
2371
2372
2373
2374
2375
2376
2377
2378
2379
2380
2381
2382
2383
2384
2385
2386
2387
2388
2389
2390
2391
2392
2393
2394
2395
2396
2397
2398
2399
2400
2401
2402
2403
2404
2405
2406
2407
2408
2409
2410
2411
2412
2413
2414
2415
2416
2417
2418
2419
2420
2421
2422
2423
2424
2425
2426
2427
2428
2429
2430
2431
2432
2433
2434
2435
2436
2437
2438
2439
2440
2441
2442
2443
2444
2445
2446
2447
2448
2449
2450
2451
2452
2453
2454
2455
2456
2457
2458
2459
2460
2461
2462
2463
2464
2465
2466
2467
2468
2469
2470
2471
2472
2473
2474
2475
2476
2477
2478
2479
2480
2481
2482
2483
2484
2485
2486
2487
2488
2489
2490
2491
2492
2493
2494
2495
2496
2497
2498
2499
2500
2501
2502
2503
2504
2505
2506
2507
2508
2509
2510
2511
2512
2513
2514
2515
2516
2517
2518
2519
2520
2521
2522
2523
2524
2525
2526
2527
2528
2529
2530
2531
2532
2533
2534
2535
2536
2537
2538
2539
2540
2541
2542
2543
2544
2545
2546
2547
2548
2549
2550
2551
2552
2553
2554
2555
2556
2557
2558
2559
2560
2561
2562
2563
2564
2565
2566
2567
2568
2569
2570
2571
2572
2573
2574
2575
2576
2577
2578
2579
2580
2581
2582
2583
2584
2585
2586
2587
2588
2589
2590
2591
2592
2593
2594
2595
2596
2597
2598
2599
2600
2601
2602
2603
2604
2605
2606
2607
2608
2609
2610
2611
2612
2613
2614
2615
2616
2617
2618
2619
2620
2621
2622
2623
2624
2625
2626
2627
2628
2629
2630
2631
2632
2633
2634
2635
2636
2637
2638
2639
2640
2641
2642
2643
2644
2645
2646
2647
2648
2649
2650
2651
2652
2653
2654
2655
2656
2657
2658
2659
2660
2661
2662
2663
2664
2665
2666
2667
2668
2669
2670
2671
2672
2673
2674
2675
2676
2677
2678
2679
2680
2681
2682
2683
2684
2685
2686
2687
2688
2689
2690
2691
2692
2693
2694
2695
2696
2697
2698
2699
2700
2701
2702
2703
2704
2705
2706
2707
2708
2709
2710
2711
2712
2713
2714
2715
2716
2717
2718
2719
2720
2721
2722
2723
2724
2725
2726
2727
2728
2729
2730
2731
2732
2733
2734
2735
2736
2737
2738
2739
2740
2741
2742
2743
2744
2745
2746
2747
2748
2749
2750
2751
2752
2753
2754
2755
2756
2757
2758
2759
2760
2761
2762
2763
2764
2765
2766
2767
2768
2769
2770
2771
2772
2773
2774
2775
2776
2777
2778
2779
2780
2781
2782
2783
2784
2785
2786
2787
2788
2789
2790
2791
2792
2793
2794
2795
2796
2797
2798
2799
2800
2801
2802
2803
2804
2805
2806
2807
2808
2809
2810
2811
2812
2813
2814
2815
2816
2817
2818
2819
2820
2821
2822
2823
2824
2825
2826
2827
2828
2829
2830
2831
2832
2833
2834
2835
2836
2837
2838
2839
2840
2841
2842
2843
2844
2845
2846
2847
2848
2849
2850
2851
2852
2853
2854
2855
2856
2857
2858
2859
2860
2861
2862
2863
2864
2865
2866
2867
2868
2869
2870
2871
2872
2873
2874
2875
2876
2877
2878
2879
2880
2881
2882
2883
2884
2885
2886
2887
2888
2889
2890
2891
2892
2893
2894
2895
2896
2897
2898
2899
2900
2901
2902
2903
2904
2905
2906
2907
2908
2909
2910
2911
2912
2913
2914
2915
2916
2917
2918
2919
2920
2921
2922
2923
2924
2925
2926
2927
2928
2929
2930
2931
2932
2933
2934
2935
2936
2937
2938
2939
2940
2941
2942
2943
2944
2945
2946
2947
2948
2949
2950
2951
2952
2953
2954
2955
2956
2957
2958
2959
2960
2961
2962
2963
2964
2965
2966
2967
2968
2969
2970
2971
2972
2973
2974
2975
2976
2977
2978
2979
2980
2981
2982
2983
2984
2985
2986
2987
2988
2989
2990
2991
2992
2993
2994
2995
2996
2997
2998
2999
3000
3001
3002
3003
3004
3005
3006
3007
3008
3009
3010
3011
3012
3013
3014
3015
3016
3017
3018
3019
3020
3021
3022
3023
3024
3025
3026
3027
3028
3029
3030
3031
3032
3033
3034
3035
3036
3037
3038
3039
3040
3041
3042
3043
3044
3045
3046
3047
3048
3049
3050
3051
3052
3053
3054
3055
3056
3057
3058
3059
3060
3061
3062
3063
3064
3065
3066
3067
3068
3069
3070
3071
3072
3073
3074
3075
3076
3077
3078
3079
3080
3081
3082
3083
3084
3085
3086
3087
3088
3089
3090
3091
3092
3093
3094
3095
3096
3097
3098
3099
3100
3101
3102
3103
3104
3105
3106
3107
3108
3109
3110
3111
3112
3113
3114
3115
3116
3117
3118
3119
3120
3121
3122
3123
3124
3125
3126
3127
3128
3129
3130
3131
3132
3133
3134
3135
3136
3137
3138
3139
3140
3141
3142
3143
3144
3145
3146
3147
3148
3149
3150
3151
3152
3153
3154
3155
3156
3157
3158
3159
3160
3161
3162
3163
3164
3165
3166
3167
3168
3169
3170
3171
3172
3173
3174
3175
3176
3177
3178
3179
3180
3181
3182
3183
3184
3185
3186
3187
3188
3189
3190
3191
3192
3193
3194
3195
3196
3197
3198
3199
3200
3201
3202
3203
3204
3205
3206
3207
3208
3209
3210
3211
3212
3213
3214
3215
3216
3217
3218
3219
3220
3221
3222
3223
3224
3225
3226
3227
3228
3229
3230
3231
3232
3233
3234
3235
3236
3237
3238
3239
3240
3241
3242
3243
3244
3245
3246
3247
3248
3249
3250
3251
3252
3253
3254
3255
3256
3257
3258
3259
3260
3261
3262
3263
3264
3265
3266
3267
3268
3269
3270
3271
3272
3273
3274
3275
3276
3277
3278
3279
3280
3281
3282
3283
3284
3285
3286
3287
3288
3289
3290
3291
3292
3293
3294
3295
3296
3297
3298
3299
3300
3301
3302
3303
3304
3305
3306
3307
3308
3309
3310
3311
3312
3313
3314
3315
3316
3317
3318
3319
3320
3321
3322
3323
3324
3325
3326
3327
3328
3329
3330
3331
3332
3333
3334
3335
3336
3337
3338
3339
3340
3341
3342
3343
3344
3345
3346
3347
3348
3349
3350
3351
3352
3353
3354
3355
3356
3357
3358
3359
3360
3361
3362
3363
3364
3365
3366
3367
3368
3369
3370
3371
3372
3373
3374
3375
3376
3377
3378
3379
3380
3381
3382
3383
3384
3385
3386
3387
3388
3389
3390
3391
3392
3393
3394
3395
3396
3397
3398
3399
3400
3401
3402
3403
3404
3405
3406
3407
3408
3409
3410
3411
3412
3413
3414
3415
3416
3417
3418
3419
3420
3421
3422
3423
3424
3425
3426
3427
3428
3429
3430
3431
3432
3433
3434
3435
3436
3437
3438
3439
3440
3441
3442
3443
3444
3445
3446
3447
3448
3449
3450
3451
3452
3453
3454
3455
3456
3457
3458
3459
3460
3461
3462
3463
3464
3465
3466
3467
3468
3469
3470
3471
3472
3473
3474
3475
3476
3477
3478
3479
3480
3481
3482
3483
3484
3485
3486
3487
3488
3489
3490
3491
3492
3493
3494
3495
3496
3497
3498
3499
3500
3501
3502
3503
3504
3505
3506
3507
3508
3509
3510
3511
3512
3513
3514
3515
3516
3517
3518
3519
3520
3521
3522
3523
3524
3525
3526
3527
3528
3529
3530
3531
3532
3533
3534
3535
3536
3537
3538
3539
3540
3541
3542
3543
3544
3545
3546
3547
3548
3549
3550
3551
3552
3553
3554
3555
3556
3557
3558
3559
3560
3561
3562
3563
3564
3565
3566
3567
3568
3569
3570
3571
3572
3573
3574
3575
3576
3577
3578
3579
3580
3581
3582
3583
3584
3585
3586
3587
3588
3589
3590
3591
3592
3593
3594
3595
3596
3597
3598
3599
3600
3601
3602
3603
3604
3605
3606
3607
3608
3609
3610
3611
3612
3613
3614
3615
3616
3617
3618
3619
3620
3621
3622
3623
3624
3625
3626
3627
3628
3629
3630
3631
3632
3633
3634
3635
3636
3637
3638
3639
3640
3641
3642
3643
3644
3645
3646
3647
3648
3649
3650
3651
3652
3653
3654
3655
3656
3657
3658
3659
3660
3661
3662
3663
3664
3665
3666
3667
3668
3669
3670
3671
3672
3673
3674
3675
3676
3677
3678
3679
3680
3681
3682
3683
3684
3685
3686
3687
3688
3689
3690
3691
3692
3693
3694
3695
3696
3697
3698
3699
3700
3701
3702
3703
3704
3705
3706
3707
3708
3709
3710
3711
3712
3713
3714
3715
3716
3717
3718
3719
3720
3721
3722
3723
3724
3725
3726
3727
3728
3729
3730
3731
3732
3733
3734
3735
3736
3737
3738
3739
3740
3741
3742
3743
3744
3745
3746
3747
3748
3749
3750
3751
3752
3753
3754
3755
3756
3757
3758
3759
3760
3761
3762
3763
3764
3765
3766
3767
3768
3769
3770
3771
3772
3773
3774
3775
3776
3777
3778
3779
3780
3781
3782
3783
3784
3785
3786
3787
3788
3789
3790
3791
3792
3793
3794
3795
3796
3797
3798
3799
3800
3801
3802
3803
3804
3805
3806
3807
3808
3809
3810
3811
3812
3813
3814
3815
3816
3817
3818
3819
3820
3821
3822
3823
3824
3825
3826
3827
3828
3829
3830
3831
3832
3833
3834
3835
3836
3837
3838
3839
3840
3841
3842
3843
3844
3845
3846
3847
3848
3849
3850
3851
3852
3853
3854
3855
3856
3857
3858
3859
3860
3861
3862
3863
3864
3865
3866
3867
3868
3869
3870
3871
3872
3873
3874
3875
3876
3877
3878
3879
3880
3881
3882
3883
3884
3885
3886
3887
3888
3889
3890
3891
3892
3893
3894
3895
3896
3897
3898
3899
3900
3901
3902
3903
3904
3905
3906
3907
3908
3909
3910
3911
3912
3913
3914
3915
3916
3917
3918
3919
3920
3921
3922
3923
3924
3925
3926
3927
3928
3929
3930
3931
3932
3933
3934
3935
3936
3937
3938
3939
3940
3941
3942
3943
3944
3945
3946
3947
3948
3949
3950
3951
3952
3953
3954
3955
3956
3957
3958
3959
3960
3961
3962
3963
3964
3965
3966
3967
3968
3969
3970
3971
3972
3973
3974
3975
3976
3977
3978
3979
3980
3981
3982
3983
3984
3985
3986
3987
3988
3989
3990
3991
3992
3993
3994
3995
3996
3997
3998
3999
4000
4001
4002
4003
4004
4005
4006
4007
4008
4009
4010
4011
4012
4013
4014
4015
4016
4017
4018
4019
4020
4021
4022
4023
4024
4025
4026
4027
4028
4029
4030
4031
4032
4033
4034
4035
4036
4037
4038
4039
4040
4041
4042
4043
4044
4045
4046
4047
4048
4049
4050
4051
4052
4053
4054
4055
4056
4057
4058
4059
4060
4061
4062
4063
4064
4065
4066
4067
4068
4069
4070
4071
4072
4073
4074
4075
4076
4077
4078
4079
4080
4081
4082
4083
4084
4085
4086
4087
4088
4089
4090
4091
4092
4093
4094
4095
4096
4097
4098
4099
4100
4101
4102
4103
4104
4105
4106
4107
4108
4109
4110
4111
4112
4113
4114
4115
4116
4117
4118
4119
4120
4121
4122
4123
4124
4125
4126
4127
4128
4129
4130
4131
4132
4133
4134
4135
4136
4137
4138
4139
4140
4141
4142
4143
4144
4145
4146
4147
4148
4149
4150
4151
4152
4153
4154
4155
4156
4157
4158
4159
4160
4161
4162
4163
4164
4165
4166
4167
4168
4169
4170
4171
4172
4173
4174
4175
4176
4177
4178
4179
4180
4181
4182
4183
4184
4185
4186
4187
4188
4189
4190
4191
4192
4193
4194
4195
4196
4197
4198
4199
4200
4201
4202
4203
4204
4205
4206
4207
4208
4209
4210
4211
4212
4213
4214
4215
4216
4217
4218
4219
4220
4221
4222
4223
4224
4225
4226
4227
4228
4229
4230
4231
4232
4233
4234
4235
4236
4237
4238
4239
4240
4241
4242
4243
4244
4245
4246
4247
4248
4249
4250
4251
4252
4253
4254
4255
4256
4257
4258
4259
4260
4261
4262
4263
4264
4265
4266
4267
4268
4269
4270
4271
4272
4273
4274
4275
4276
4277
4278
4279
4280
4281
4282
4283
4284
4285
4286
4287
4288
4289
4290
4291
4292
4293
4294
4295
4296
4297
4298
4299
4300
4301
4302
4303
4304
4305
4306
4307
4308
4309
4310
4311
4312
4313
4314
4315
4316
4317
4318
4319
4320
4321
4322
4323
4324
4325
4326
4327
4328
4329
4330
4331
4332
4333
4334
4335
4336
4337
4338
4339
4340
4341
4342
4343
4344
4345
4346
4347
4348
4349
4350
4351
4352
4353
4354
4355
4356
4357
4358
4359
4360
4361
4362
4363
4364
4365
4366
4367
4368
4369
4370
4371
4372
4373
4374
4375
4376
4377
4378
4379
4380
4381
4382
4383
4384
4385
4386
4387
4388
4389
4390
4391
4392
4393
4394
4395
4396
4397
4398
4399
4400
4401
4402
4403
4404
4405
4406
4407
4408
4409
4410
4411
4412
4413
4414
4415
4416
4417
4418
4419
4420
4421
4422
4423
4424
4425
4426
4427
4428
4429
4430
4431
4432
4433
4434
4435
4436
4437
4438
4439
4440
4441
4442
4443
4444
4445
4446
4447
4448
4449
4450
4451
4452
4453
4454
4455
4456
4457
4458
4459
4460
4461
4462
4463
4464
4465
4466
4467
4468
4469
4470
4471
4472
4473
4474
4475
4476
4477
4478
4479
4480
4481
4482
4483
4484
4485
4486
4487
4488
4489
4490
4491
4492
4493
4494
4495
4496
4497
4498
4499
4500
4501
4502
4503
4504
4505
4506
4507
4508
4509
4510
4511
4512
4513
4514
4515
4516
4517
4518
4519
4520
4521
4522
4523
4524
4525
4526
4527
4528
4529
4530
4531
4532
4533
4534
4535
4536
4537
4538
4539
4540
4541
4542
4543
4544
4545
4546
4547
4548
4549
4550
4551
4552
4553
4554
4555
4556
4557
4558
4559
4560
4561
4562
4563
4564
4565
4566
4567
4568
4569
4570
4571
4572
4573
4574
4575
4576
4577
4578
4579
4580
4581
4582
4583
4584
4585
4586
4587
4588
4589
4590
4591
4592
4593
4594
4595
4596
4597
4598
4599
4600
4601
4602
4603
4604
4605
4606
4607
4608
4609
4610
4611
4612
4613
4614
4615
4616
4617
4618
4619
4620
4621
4622
4623
4624
4625
4626
4627
4628
4629
4630
4631
4632
4633
4634
4635
4636
4637
4638
4639
4640
4641
4642
4643
4644
4645
4646
4647
4648
4649
4650
4651
4652
4653
4654
4655
4656
4657
4658
4659
4660
4661
4662
4663
4664
4665
4666
4667
4668
4669
4670
4671
4672
4673
4674
4675
4676
4677
4678
4679
4680
4681
4682
4683
4684
4685
4686
4687
4688
4689
4690
4691
4692
4693
4694
4695
4696
4697
4698
4699
4700
4701
4702
4703
4704
4705
4706
4707
4708
4709
4710
4711
4712
4713
4714
4715
4716
4717
4718
4719
4720
4721
4722
4723
4724
4725
4726
4727
4728
4729
4730
4731
4732
4733
4734
4735
4736
4737
4738
4739
4740
4741
4742
4743
4744
4745
4746
4747
4748
4749
4750
4751
4752
4753
4754
4755
4756
4757
4758
4759
4760
4761
4762
4763
4764
4765
4766
4767
4768
4769
4770
4771
4772
4773
4774
4775
4776
4777
4778
4779
4780
4781
4782
4783
4784
4785
4786
4787
4788
4789
4790
4791
4792
4793
4794
4795
4796
4797
4798
4799
4800
4801
4802
4803
4804
4805
4806
4807
4808
4809
4810
4811
4812
4813
4814
4815
4816
4817
4818
4819
4820
4821
4822
4823
4824
4825
4826
4827
4828
4829
4830
4831
4832
4833
4834
4835
4836
4837
4838
4839
4840
4841
4842
4843
4844
4845
4846
4847
4848
4849
4850
4851
4852
4853
4854
4855
4856
4857
4858
4859
4860
4861
4862
4863
4864
4865
4866
4867
4868
4869
4870
4871
4872
4873
4874
4875
4876
4877
4878
4879
4880
4881
4882
4883
4884
4885
4886
4887
4888
4889
4890
4891
4892
4893
4894
4895
4896
4897
4898
4899
4900
4901
4902
4903
4904
4905
4906
4907
4908
4909
4910
4911
4912
4913
4914
4915
4916
4917
4918
4919
4920
4921
4922
4923
4924
4925
4926
4927
4928
4929
4930
4931
4932
4933
4934
4935
4936
4937
4938
4939
4940
4941
4942
4943
4944
4945
4946
4947
4948
4949
4950
4951
4952
4953
4954
4955
4956
4957
4958
4959
4960
4961
4962
4963
4964
4965
4966
4967
4968
4969
4970
4971
4972
4973
4974
4975
4976
4977
4978
4979
4980
4981
4982
4983
4984
4985
4986
4987
4988
4989
4990
4991
4992
4993
4994
4995
4996
4997
4998
4999
5000
5001
5002
5003
5004
5005
5006
5007
5008
5009
5010
5011
5012
5013
5014
5015
5016
5017
5018
5019
5020
5021
5022
5023
5024
5025
5026
5027
5028
5029
5030
5031
5032
5033
5034
5035
5036
5037
5038
5039
5040
5041
5042
5043
5044
5045
5046
5047
5048
5049
5050
5051
5052
5053
5054
5055
5056
5057
5058
5059
5060
5061
5062
5063
5064
5065
5066
5067
5068
5069
5070
5071
5072
5073
5074
5075
5076
5077
5078
5079
5080
5081
5082
5083
5084
5085
5086
5087
5088
5089
5090
5091
5092
5093
5094
5095
5096
5097
5098
5099
5100
5101
5102
5103
5104
5105
5106
5107
5108
5109
5110
5111
5112
5113
5114
5115
5116
5117
5118
5119
5120
5121
5122
5123
5124
5125
5126
5127
5128
5129
5130
5131
5132
5133
5134
5135
5136
5137
5138
5139
5140
5141
5142
5143
5144
5145
5146
5147
5148
5149
5150
5151
5152
5153
5154
5155
5156
5157
5158
5159
5160
5161
5162
5163
5164
5165
5166
5167
5168
5169
5170
5171
5172
5173
5174
5175
5176
5177
5178
5179
5180
5181
5182
5183
5184
5185
5186
5187
5188
5189
5190
5191
5192
5193
5194
5195
5196
5197
5198
5199
5200
5201
5202
5203
5204
5205
5206
5207
5208
5209
5210
5211
5212
5213
5214
5215
5216
5217
5218
5219
5220
5221
5222
5223
5224
5225
5226
5227
5228
5229
5230
5231
5232
5233
5234
5235
5236
5237
5238
5239
5240
5241
5242
5243
5244
5245
5246
5247
5248
5249
5250
5251
5252
5253
5254
5255
5256
5257
5258
5259
5260
5261
5262
5263
5264
5265
5266
5267
5268
5269
5270
5271
5272
5273
5274
5275
5276
5277
5278
5279
5280
5281
5282
5283
5284
5285
5286
5287
5288
5289
5290
5291
5292
5293
5294
5295
5296
5297
5298
5299
5300
5301
5302
5303
5304
5305
5306
5307
5308
5309
5310
5311
5312
5313
5314
5315
5316
5317
5318
5319
5320
5321
5322
5323
5324
5325
5326
5327
5328
5329
5330
5331
5332
5333
5334
5335
5336
5337
5338
5339
5340
5341
5342
5343
5344
5345
5346
5347
5348
5349
5350
5351
5352
5353
5354
5355
5356
5357
5358
5359
5360
5361
5362
5363
5364
5365
5366
5367
5368
5369
5370
5371
5372
5373
5374
5375
5376
5377
5378
5379
5380
5381
5382
5383
5384
5385
5386
5387
5388
5389
5390
5391
5392
5393
5394
5395
5396
5397
5398
5399
5400
5401
5402
5403
5404
5405
5406
5407
5408
5409
5410
5411
5412
5413
5414
5415
5416
5417
5418
5419
5420
5421
5422
5423
5424
5425
5426
5427
5428
5429
5430
5431
5432
5433
5434
5435
5436
5437
5438
5439
5440
5441
5442
5443
5444
5445
5446
5447
5448
5449
5450
5451
5452
5453
5454
5455
5456
5457
5458
5459
5460
5461
5462
5463
5464
5465
5466
5467
5468
5469
5470
5471
5472
5473
5474
5475
5476
5477
5478
5479
5480
5481
5482
5483
5484
5485
5486
5487
5488
5489
5490
5491
5492
5493
5494
5495
5496
5497
5498
5499
5500
5501
5502
5503
5504
5505
5506
5507
5508
5509
5510
5511
5512
5513
5514
5515
5516
5517
5518
5519
5520
5521
5522
5523
5524
5525
5526
5527
5528
5529
5530
5531
5532
5533
5534
5535
5536
5537
5538
5539
5540
5541
5542
5543
5544
5545
5546
5547
5548
5549
5550
5551
5552
5553
5554
5555
5556
5557
5558
5559
5560
5561
5562
5563
5564
5565
5566
5567
5568
5569
5570
5571
5572
5573
5574
5575
5576
5577
5578
5579
5580
5581
5582
5583
5584
5585
5586
5587
5588
5589
5590
5591
5592
5593
5594
5595
5596
5597
5598
5599
5600
5601
5602
5603
5604
5605
5606
5607
5608
5609
5610
5611
5612
5613
5614
5615
5616
5617
5618
5619
5620
5621
5622
5623
5624
5625
5626
5627
5628
5629
5630
5631
5632
5633
5634
5635
5636
5637
5638
5639
5640
5641
5642
5643
5644
5645
5646
5647
5648
5649
5650
5651
5652
5653
5654
5655
5656
5657
5658
5659
5660
5661
5662
5663
5664
5665
5666
5667
5668
5669
5670
5671
5672
5673
5674
5675
5676
5677
5678
5679
5680
5681
5682
5683
5684
5685
5686
5687
5688
5689
5690
5691
5692
5693
5694
5695
5696
5697
5698
5699
5700
5701
5702
5703
5704
5705
5706
5707
5708
5709
5710
5711
5712
5713
5714
5715
5716
5717
5718
5719
5720
5721
5722
5723
5724
5725
5726
5727
5728
5729
5730
5731
5732
5733
5734
5735
5736
5737
5738
5739
5740
5741
5742
5743
5744
5745
5746
5747
5748
5749
5750
5751
5752
5753
5754
5755
5756
5757
5758
5759
5760
5761
5762
5763
5764
5765
5766
5767
5768
5769
5770
5771
5772
5773
5774
5775
5776
5777
5778
5779
5780
5781
5782
5783
5784
5785
5786
5787
5788
5789
5790
5791
5792
5793
5794
5795
5796
5797
5798
5799
5800
5801
5802
5803
5804
5805
5806
5807
5808
5809
5810
5811
5812
5813
5814
5815
5816
5817
5818
5819
5820
5821
5822
5823
5824
5825
5826
5827
5828
5829
5830
5831
5832
5833
5834
5835
5836
5837
5838
5839
5840
5841
5842
5843
5844
5845
5846
5847
5848
5849
5850
5851
5852
5853
5854
5855
5856
5857
5858
5859
5860
5861
5862
5863
5864
5865
5866
5867
5868
5869
5870
5871
5872
5873
5874
5875
5876
5877
5878
5879
5880
5881
5882
5883
5884
5885
5886
5887
5888
5889
5890
5891
5892
5893
5894
5895
5896
5897
5898
5899
5900
5901
5902
5903
5904
5905
5906
5907
5908
5909
5910
5911
5912
5913
5914
5915
5916
5917
5918
5919
5920
5921
5922
5923
5924
5925
5926
5927
5928
5929
5930
5931
5932
5933
5934
5935
5936
5937
5938
5939
5940
5941
5942
5943
5944
5945
5946
5947
5948
5949
5950
5951
5952
5953
5954
5955
5956
5957
5958
5959
5960
5961
5962
5963
5964
5965
5966
5967
5968
5969
5970
5971
5972
5973
5974
5975
5976
5977
5978
5979
5980
5981
5982
5983
5984
5985
5986
5987
5988
5989
5990
5991
5992
5993
5994
5995
5996
5997
5998
5999
6000
6001
6002
6003
6004
6005
6006
6007
6008
6009
6010
6011
6012
6013
6014
6015
6016
6017
6018
6019
6020
6021
6022
6023
6024
6025
6026
6027
6028
6029
6030
6031
6032
6033
6034
6035
6036
6037
6038
6039
6040
6041
6042
6043
6044
6045
6046
6047
6048
6049
6050
6051
6052
6053
6054
6055
6056
6057
6058
6059
6060
6061
6062
6063
6064
6065
6066
6067
6068
6069
6070
6071
6072
6073
6074
6075
6076
6077
6078
6079
6080
6081
6082
6083
6084
6085
6086
6087
6088
6089
6090
6091
6092
6093
6094
6095
6096
6097
6098
6099
6100
6101
6102
6103
6104
6105
6106
6107
6108
6109
6110
6111
6112
6113
6114
6115
6116
6117
6118
6119
6120
6121
6122
6123
6124
6125
6126
6127
6128
6129
6130
6131
6132
6133
6134
6135
6136
6137
6138
6139
6140
6141
6142
6143
6144
6145
6146
6147
6148
6149
6150
6151
6152
6153
6154
6155
6156
6157
6158
6159
6160
6161
6162
6163
6164
6165
6166
6167
6168
6169
6170
6171
6172
6173
6174
6175
6176
6177
6178
6179
6180
6181
6182
6183
6184
6185
6186
6187
6188
6189
6190
6191
6192
6193
6194
6195
6196
6197
6198
6199
6200
6201
6202
6203
6204
6205
6206
6207
6208
6209
6210
6211
6212
6213
6214
6215
6216
6217
6218
6219
6220
6221
6222
6223
6224
6225
6226
6227
6228
6229
6230
6231
6232
6233
6234
6235
6236
6237
6238
6239
6240
6241
6242
6243
6244
6245
6246
6247
6248
6249
6250
6251
6252
6253
6254
6255
6256
6257
6258
6259
6260
6261
6262
6263
6264
6265
6266
6267
6268
6269
6270
6271
6272
6273
6274
6275
6276
6277
6278
6279
6280
6281
6282
6283
6284
6285
6286
6287
6288
6289
6290
6291
6292
6293
6294
6295
6296
6297
6298
6299
6300
6301
6302
6303
6304
6305
6306
6307
6308
6309
6310
6311
6312
6313
6314
6315
6316
6317
6318
6319
6320
6321
6322
6323
6324
6325
6326
6327
6328
6329
6330
6331
6332
6333
6334
6335
6336
6337
6338
6339
6340
6341
6342
6343
6344
6345
6346
6347
%%
%% IEEEtran.cls 2015/08/26 version V1.8b
%% 
%% This is the IEEEtran LaTeX class for authors of the Institute of 
%% Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Transactions journals and
%% conferences.
%% 
%% Support sites:
%% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/
%% http://www.ctan.org/pkg/ieeetran
%% and
%% http://www.ieee.org/
%%
%% Based on the original 1993 IEEEtran.cls, but with many bug fixes
%% and enhancements (from both JVH and MDS) over the 1996/7 version.
%%
%%
%% Contributors:
%% Gerry Murray (1993), Silvano Balemi (1993),
%% Jon Dixon (1996), Peter N"uchter (1996),
%% Juergen von Hagen (2000), and Michael Shell (2001-2014)
%% 
%% 
%% Copyright (c) 1993-2000 by Gerry Murray, Silvano Balemi, 
%%                         Jon Dixon, Peter N"uchter,
%%                         Juergen von Hagen
%%                         and
%% Copyright (c) 2001-2015 by Michael Shell
%%
%% Current maintainer (V1.3 to V1.8b): Michael Shell
%%                                     See:
%%                                     http://www.michaelshell.org/
%%                                     for current contact information.
%%
%% Special thanks to Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau
%% for allowing the inclusion of the \@ifmtarg command 
%% from their ifmtarg LaTeX package. 
%% 
%%*************************************************************************
%% Legal Notice:
%% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or
%% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
%% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! 
%% User assumes all risk.
%% In no event shall the IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for
%% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental,
%% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse
%% of any information contained here.
%%
%% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not
%% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE.
%%
%% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL)
%% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used,
%% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included
%% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released
%% 2003/12/01 or later.
%% Retain all contribution notices and credits.
%% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including  **
%% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. **
%%
%% File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex,
%%                    bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_conf_compsoc.tex,
%%                    bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex
%% 
%% Major changes to the user interface should be indicated by an 
%% increase in the version numbers. If a version is a beta, it will 
%% be indicated with a BETA suffix, i.e., 1.4 BETA.
%% Small changes can be indicated by appending letters to the version
%% such as "IEEEtran_v14a.cls".
%% In all cases, \Providesclass, any \typeout messages to the user,
%% \IEEEtransversionmajor and \IEEEtransversionminor must reflect the
%% correct version information.
%% The changes should also be documented via source comments.
%%*************************************************************************
%%
%
% Available class options 
% e.g., \documentclass[10pt,conference]{IEEEtran} 
% 
%             *** choose only one from each category ***
%
% 9pt, 10pt, 11pt, 12pt
%    Sets normal font size. The default is 10pt.
% 
% conference, journal, technote, peerreview, peerreviewca
%    determines format mode - conference papers, journal papers,
%    correspondence papers (technotes), or peer review papers. The user
%    should also select 9pt when using technote. peerreview is like
%    journal mode, but provides for a single-column "cover" title page for
%    anonymous peer review. The paper title (without the author names) is
%    repeated at the top of the page after the cover page. For peer review
%    papers, the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle command must be executed (will
%    automatically be ignored for non-peerreview modes) at the place the
%    cover page is to end, usually just after the abstract (keywords are
%    not normally used with peer review papers). peerreviewca is like
%    peerreview, but allows the author names to be entered and formatted
%    as with conference mode so that author affiliation and contact
%    information can be easily seen on the cover page.
%    The default is journal.
%
% draft, draftcls, draftclsnofoot, final
%    determines if paper is formatted as a widely spaced draft (for
%    handwritten editor comments) or as a properly typeset final version.
%    draftcls restricts draft mode to the class file while all other LaTeX
%    packages (i.e., \usepackage{graphicx}) will behave as final - allows
%    for a draft paper with visible figures, etc. draftclsnofoot is like
%    draftcls, but does not display the date and the word "DRAFT" at the foot
%    of the pages. If using one of the draft modes, the user will probably
%    also want to select onecolumn.
%    The default is final.
%
% letterpaper, a4paper, cspaper
%    determines paper size: 8.5in X 11in, 210mm X 297mm or 7.875in X 10.75in.
%    Changing the paper size in the standard journal and conference modes
%    will not alter the typesetting of the document - only the margins will
%    be affected. In particular, documents using the a4paper option will
%    have reduced side margins (A4 is narrower than US letter) and a longer
%    bottom margin (A4 is longer than US letter). For both cases, the top
%    margins will be the same and the text will be horizontally centered.
%    For the compsoc conference and draft modes, it is the margins that will
%    remain constant, and thus the text area size will vary, with changes in
%    the paper size.
%    The cspaper option is the special ``trim'' paper size (7.875in x 10.75in)
%    used in the actual publication of Computer Society journals. Under
%    compsoc journal mode, this option does not alter the typesetting of the
%    document. Authors should invoke the cspaper option only if requested to
%    do so by the editors of the specific journal they are submitting to.
%    For final submission to the IEEE, authors should generally use US letter 
%    (8.5 X 11in) paper unless otherwise instructed. Note that authors should
%    ensure that all post-processing (ps, pdf, etc.) uses the same paper
%    specificiation as the .tex document. Problems here are by far the number
%    one reason for incorrect margins. IEEEtran will automatically set the
%    default paper size under pdflatex (without requiring any change to
%    pdftex.cfg), so this issue is more important to dvips users. Fix
%    config.ps, config.pdf, or ~/.dvipsrc for dvips, or use the
%    dvips -t papersize option instead as needed. For the cspaper option,
%    the corresponding dvips paper name is "ieeecs".
%    See the testflow documentation
%    http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/testflow
%    for more details on dvips paper size configuration.
%    The default is letterpaper.
%
% oneside, twoside
%    determines if layout follows single sided or two sided (duplex)
%    printing. The only notable change is with the headings at the top of
%    the pages.
%    The default is oneside.
%
% onecolumn, twocolumn
%    determines if text is organized into one or two columns per page. One
%    column mode is usually used only with draft papers.
%    The default is twocolumn.
%
% comsoc, compsoc, transmag
%    Use the format of the IEEE Communications Society, IEEE Computer Society
%    or IEEE Transactions on Magnetics, respectively.
%
% romanappendices
%    Use the "Appendix I" convention when numbering appendices. IEEEtran.cls
%    now defaults to Alpha "Appendix A" convention - the opposite of what
%    v1.6b and earlier did.
%
% captionsoff
%    disables the display of the figure/table captions. Some IEEE journals
%    request that captions be removed and figures/tables be put on pages
%    of their own at the end of an initial paper submission. The endfloat
%    package can be used with this class option to achieve this format.
%
% nofonttune
%    turns off tuning of the font interword spacing. Maybe useful to those
%    not using the standard Times fonts or for those who have already "tuned"
%    their fonts.
%    The default is to enable IEEEtran to tune font parameters.
%
%
%----------
% Available CLASSINPUTs provided (all are macros unless otherwise noted):
% \CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch
% \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin
% \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin
% \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin
% \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin
%
% Available CLASSINFOs provided:
% \ifCLASSINFOpdf                       (TeX if conditional)
% \CLASSINFOpaperwidth                  (macro)
% \CLASSINFOpaperheight                 (macro)
% \CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip      (length)
% \CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip (length)
%
% Available CLASSOPTIONs provided:
% all class option flags (TeX if conditionals) unless otherwise noted,
% e.g., \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff
% point size options provided as a single macro:
% \CLASSOPTIONpt
% which will be defined as 9, 10, 11, or 12 depending on the document's
% normalsize point size.
% also, class option peerreviewca implies the use of class option peerreview
% and classoption draft implies the use of class option draftcls





\ProvidesClass{IEEEtran}[2015/08/26 V1.8b by Michael Shell]
\typeout{-- See the "IEEEtran_HOWTO" manual for usage information.}
\typeout{-- http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/}
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}

% IEEEtran.cls version numbers, provided as of V1.3
% These values serve as a way a .tex file can
% determine if the new features are provided.
% The version number of this IEEEtrans.cls can be obtained from 
% these values. i.e., V1.4
% KEEP THESE AS INTEGERS! i.e., NO {4a} or anything like that-
% (no need to enumerate "a" minor changes here)
\def\IEEEtransversionmajor{1}
\def\IEEEtransversionminor{8}


% hook to allow easy changeover to IEEEtran.cls/tools.sty error reporting
\def\@IEEEclspkgerror{\ClassError{IEEEtran}}


% These do nothing, but provide them like in article.cls
\newif\if@restonecol
\newif\if@titlepage


% class option conditionals
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONonecolumn       \CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn       \CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue

\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONoneside         \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside         \CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse

\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONfinal           \CLASSOPTIONfinaltrue
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraft           \CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls        \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot  \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse

\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview      \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca    \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse

\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONjournal         \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONconference      \CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote        \CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse

\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune      \CLASSOPTIONnofonttunefalse

\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff     \CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofffalse

\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcomsoc          \CLASSOPTIONcomsocfalse
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc         \CLASSOPTIONcompsocfalse
\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag        \CLASSOPTIONtransmagfalse

\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices \CLASSOPTIONromanappendicesfalse


% class info conditionals

% indicates if pdf (via pdflatex) output
\newif\ifCLASSINFOpdf               \CLASSINFOpdffalse


% V1.6b internal flag to show if using a4paper
\newif\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper       \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse
% V1.6b internal flag to show if using cspaper
\newif\if@IEEEusingcspaper          \@IEEEusingcspaperfalse


% IEEEtran class scratch pad registers
% dimen
\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
% count
\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountA
\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountB
\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountC
% token list
\newtoks\@IEEEtrantmptoksA

% we use \CLASSOPTIONpt so that we can ID the point size (even for 9pt docs)
% as well as LaTeX's \@ptsize to retain some compatability with some
% external packages
\def\@ptsize{0}
% LaTeX does not support 9pt, so we set \@ptsize to 0 - same as that of 10pt
\DeclareOption{9pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{9}\def\@ptsize{0}}
\DeclareOption{10pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{10}\def\@ptsize{0}}
\DeclareOption{11pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{11}\def\@ptsize{1}}
\DeclareOption{12pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{12}\def\@ptsize{2}}



\DeclareOption{letterpaper}{\setlength{\paperwidth}{8.5in}%
                            \setlength{\paperheight}{11in}%
                            \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse
                            \@IEEEusingcspaperfalse
                            \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{letter}%
                            \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{8.5in}%
                            \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{11in}}


\DeclareOption{a4paper}{\setlength{\paperwidth}{210mm}%
                        \setlength{\paperheight}{297mm}%
                        \@IEEEusingAfourpapertrue
                        \@IEEEusingcspaperfalse
                        \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{a4}%
                        \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{210mm}%
                        \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{297mm}}

% special paper option for compsoc journals
\DeclareOption{cspaper}{\setlength{\paperwidth}{7.875in}%
                        \setlength{\paperheight}{10.75in}%
                        \@IEEEusingcspapertrue
                        \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse
                        \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{ieeecs}%
                        \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{7.875in}%
                        \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{10.75in}}

\DeclareOption{oneside}{\@twosidefalse\@mparswitchfalse
                        \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue\CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse}
\DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue\@mparswitchtrue
                        \CLASSOPTIONtwosidetrue\CLASSOPTIONonesidefalse}

\DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONonecolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumnfalse}
\DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse}

% If the user selects draft, then this class AND any packages
% will go into draft mode.
\DeclareOption{draft}{\CLASSOPTIONdrafttrue\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue
                      \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} 
% draftcls is for a draft mode which will not affect any packages
% used by the document.
\DeclareOption{draftcls}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue
                         \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} 
% draftclsnofoot is like draftcls, but without the footer.
\DeclareOption{draftclsnofoot}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue
                               \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoottrue} 
\DeclareOption{final}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse
                      \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse}

\DeclareOption{journal}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
                        \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}

\DeclareOption{conference}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
                           \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencetrue\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}

\DeclareOption{technote}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
                         \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotetrue}

\DeclareOption{peerreview}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
                           \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}

\DeclareOption{peerreviewca}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcatrue
                             \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}

\DeclareOption{nofonttune}{\CLASSOPTIONnofonttunetrue}

\DeclareOption{captionsoff}{\CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofftrue}

\DeclareOption{comsoc}{\CLASSOPTIONcomsoctrue\CLASSOPTIONcompsocfalse\CLASSOPTIONtransmagfalse}

\DeclareOption{compsoc}{\CLASSOPTIONcomsocfalse\CLASSOPTIONcompsoctrue\CLASSOPTIONtransmagfalse}

\DeclareOption{transmag}{\CLASSOPTIONtransmagtrue\CLASSOPTIONcomsocfalse\CLASSOPTIONcompsocfalse}

\DeclareOption{romanappendices}{\CLASSOPTIONromanappendicestrue}


% default to US letter paper, 10pt, twocolumn, one sided, final, journal
\ExecuteOptions{letterpaper,10pt,twocolumn,oneside,final,journal}
% overrride these defaults per user requests
\ProcessOptions



%% -- Command Argument Scanning Support Functions --

% Sets the category codes for punctuation to their normal values.
% For local use with argument scanning.
\def\IEEEnormalcatcodespunct{\catcode`\!=12 \catcode`\,=12 \catcode`\:=12
\catcode`\;=12 \catcode`\`=12 \catcode`\'=12 \catcode`\"=12 \catcode`\.=12
\catcode`\/=12 \catcode`\?=12 \catcode`\*=12 \catcode`\+=12 \catcode`\-=12
\catcode`\<=12 \catcode`\>=12 \catcode`\(=12 \catcode`\)=12 \catcode`\[=12
\catcode`\]=12 \catcode`\==12 \catcode`\|=12}
% Sets the category codes for numbers to their normal values.
% For local use with argument scanning.
\def\IEEEnormalcatcodesnum{\catcode`\0=12 \catcode`\1=12 \catcode`\2=12
\catcode`\3=12 \catcode`\4=12 \catcode`\5=12 \catcode`\6=12 \catcode`\7=12
\catcode`\8=12 \catcode`\9=12}
% combined action of \IEEEnormalcatcodespunct and \IEEEnormalcatcodesnum
\def\IEEEnormalcatcodes{\IEEEnormalcatcodespunct\IEEEnormalcatcodesnum}


% usage: \@IEEEextracttoken*{}
% \@IEEEextracttoken fully expands its argument (which it then stores in
% \@IEEEextracttokenarg) via \edef and then the meaning of the first
% nonbrace (but including the empty group) token found is assigned via \let
% to \@IEEEextractedtoken as well as stored in the macro
% \@IEEEextractedtokenmacro. Tokens that would otherwise be discarded during
% the acquisition of the first are stored in \@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded,
% however their original relative brace nesting depths are not guaranteed to
% be preserved.
% If the argument is empty, or if a first nonbrace token does not exist (or
% is an empty group), \@IEEEextractedtoken will be \relax and
% \@IEEEextractedtokenmacro and \@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded will be empty.
%
% For example:
% \@IEEEextracttoken{{{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g}}
% results in:
%
% \@IEEEextracttokenarg          ==> a macro containing {{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g}
% \@IEEEextractedtoken           ==> the letter a
% \@IEEEextractedtokenmacro      ==> a macro containing a
% \@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded ==> a macro containing bcd{ef}g
%
% the *-star form, \@IEEEextracttoken*, does not expand its argument
% contents during processing.
\def\@IEEEextracttoken{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEextracttokendef=\def\@@IEEEextracttoken}{\let\@IEEEextracttokendef=\edef\@@IEEEextracttoken}}

\def\@@IEEEextracttoken#1{\@IEEEextracttokendef\@IEEEextracttokenarg{#1}\relax
\def\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded{}\relax % initialize to empty
% if the macro is unchanged after being acquired as a single undelimited argument
% with anything after it being stripped off as a delimited argument
% we know we have one token without any enclosing braces. loop until this is true.
\let\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup\@IEEEextracttokenarg
\loop
  % trap case of an empty argument as this would cause a problem with
  % \@@@IEEEextracttoken's first (nondelimited) argument acquisition
  \ifx\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup\@empty
    \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{}\relax
  \else
    \expandafter\@@@IEEEextracttoken\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER\relax
  \fi
  \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup
  \else
    \let\@IEEEextracttokencurgroup=\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro
\repeat
% we can safely do a \let= here because there should be at most one token
% the relax is needed to handle the case of no token found
\expandafter\let\expandafter\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\relax}

\def\@@@IEEEextracttoken#1#2\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER{\def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{#1}\relax
\def\@@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded{#2}\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
{\expandafter\@@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded}}
%%
%% -- End of Command Argument Scanning Support Functions --



% Computer Society conditional execution command
\long\def\@IEEEcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\relax#1\relax\fi\relax}
% inverse
\long\def\@IEEEnotcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\relax#1\relax\fi\relax}
% compsoc conference
\long\def\@IEEEcompsocconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax}
% compsoc not conference
\long\def\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax}


% comsoc verify that newtxmath, mtpro2, mt11p or mathtime has been loaded
\def\@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont{\typeout{-- Verifying Times compatible math font.}\relax
  \@ifpackageloaded{newtxmath}{\typeout{-- newtxmath loaded, OK.}}{\@@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont}}
\def\@@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont{\@ifpackageloaded{mtpro2}{\typeout{-- mtpro2 loaded, OK.}}{\@@@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont}}
\def\@@@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont{\@ifpackageloaded{mt11p}{\typeout{-- mt11p2 loaded, OK.}}{\@@@@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont}}
\def\@@@@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont{\@ifpackageloaded{mathtime}{\typeout{-- mathtime loaded, OK.}}{\@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont}}

% comsoc, if a Times math font was not loaded by user, enforce it
\def\@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont{\typeout{** Times compatible math font not found, forcing.}\relax
\IfFileExists{newtxmath.sty}{\typeout{-- Found newtxmath, loading.}\RequirePackage{newtxmath}}{\@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont}}
\def\@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont{\IfFileExists{mtpro2.sty}{\typeout{-- Found mtpro2, loading.}\RequirePackage{mtpro2}}{\@@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont}}
\def\@@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont{\IfFileExists{mt11p.sty}{\typeout{-- Found mt11p, loading.}\RequirePackage{mt11p}}{\@@@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont}}
\def\@@@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont{\IfFileExists{mathtime.sty}{\typeout{-- Found mathtime, loading.}\RequirePackage{mathtime}}{\@@@@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont}}
% if no acceptable Times math font package found, error with newtxmath requirement
\def\@@@@@IEEEcomsocenforcemathfont{\typeout{** No Times compatible math font package found. newtxmath is required.}\RequirePackage{newtxmath}}


\ifCLASSOPTIONcomsoc
  % ensure that if newtxmath is used, the cmintegrals option is also invoked
  \PassOptionsToPackage{cmintegrals}{newtxmath}
  % comsoc requires a Times like math font
  % ensure this requirement is satisfied at document start
  \AtBeginDocument{\@IEEEcomsocverifymathfont}
\fi



% The IEEE uses Times Roman font, so we'll default to Times.
% These three commands make up the entire times.sty package.
\renewcommand{\sfdefault}{phv}
\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ptm}
\renewcommand{\ttdefault}{pcr}

% V1.7 compsoc nonconference papers, use Palatino/Palladio as the main text font,
% not Times Roman.
\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ppl}}

% enable the selected main text font
\normalfont\selectfont


\ifCLASSOPTIONcomsoc
  \typeout{-- Using IEEE Communications Society mode.}
\fi

\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  \typeout{-- Using IEEE Computer Society mode.}
\fi


% V1.7 conference notice message hook
\def\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference{\typeout{}%
\typeout{** Conference Paper **}%
\typeout{Before submitting the final camera ready copy, remember to:}%
\typeout{}%
\typeout{ 1. Manually equalize the lengths of two columns on the last page}%
\typeout{ of your paper;}%
\typeout{}%
\typeout{ 2. Ensure that any PostScript and/or PDF output post-processing}%
\typeout{ uses only Type 1 fonts and that every step in the generation}%
\typeout{ process uses the appropriate paper size.}%
\typeout{}}


% we can send console reminder messages to the user here
\AtEndDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference\fi}


% warn about the use of single column other than for draft mode
\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn\else%
  \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls\else%
   \typeout{** ATTENTION: Single column mode is not typically used with IEEE publications.}%
  \fi%
\fi


% V1.7 improved paper size setting code.
% Set pdfpage and dvips paper sizes. Conditional tests are similar to that
% of ifpdf.sty. Retain within {} to ensure tested macros are never altered,
% even if only effect is to set them to \relax.
% if \pdfoutput is undefined or equal to relax, output a dvips special
{\@ifundefined{pdfoutput}{\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}}{%
% pdfoutput is defined and not equal to \relax
% check for pdfpageheight existence just in case someone sets pdfoutput
% under non-pdflatex. If exists, set them regardless of value of \pdfoutput.
\@ifundefined{pdfpageheight}{\relax}{\global\pdfpagewidth\paperwidth
\global\pdfpageheight\paperheight}%
% if using \pdfoutput=0 under pdflatex, send dvips papersize special
\ifcase\pdfoutput
\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}%
\else
% we are using pdf output, set CLASSINFOpdf flag
\global\CLASSINFOpdftrue
\fi}}

% let the user know the selected papersize
\typeout{-- Using \CLASSINFOpaperwidth\space x \CLASSINFOpaperheight\space
(\CLASSOPTIONpaper)\space paper.}

\ifCLASSINFOpdf
\typeout{-- Using PDF output.}
\else
\typeout{-- Using DVI output.}
\fi


% The idea hinted here is for LaTeX to generate markleft{} and markright{}
% automatically for you after you enter \author{}, \journal{},
% \journaldate{}, journalvol{}, \journalnum{}, etc.
% However, there may be some backward compatibility issues here as
% well as some special applications for IEEEtran.cls and special issues
% that may require the flexible \markleft{}, \markright{} and/or \markboth{}.
% We'll leave this as an open future suggestion.
%\newcommand{\journal}[1]{\def\@journal{#1}}
%\def\@journal{}



% pointsize values
% used with ifx to determine the document's normal size
\def\@IEEEptsizenine{9}
\def\@IEEEptsizeten{10}
\def\@IEEEptsizeeleven{11}
\def\@IEEEptsizetwelve{12}



% FONT DEFINITIONS (No sizexx.clo file needed) 
% V1.6 revised font sizes, displayskip values and
%      revised normalsize baselineskip to reduce underfull vbox problems
%      on the 58pc = 696pt = 9.5in text height we want
%      normalsize     #lines/column  baselineskip (aka leading)
%             9pt     63             11.0476pt (truncated down)
%            10pt     58             12pt      (exact)
%            11pt     52             13.3846pt (truncated down)
%            12pt     50             13.92pt   (exact)
%

% we need to store the nominal baselineskip for the given font size
% in case baselinestretch ever changes.
% this is a dimen, so it will not hold stretch or shrink
\newdimen\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\baselineskip



%% ******* WARNING! *******
%%
%% Authors should not alter font sizes, baselineskip ("leading"),
%% margins or other spacing values in an attempt to squeeze more
%% material on each page.
%%
%% The IEEE's own typesetting software will restore the correct
%% values when re-typesetting/proofing the submitted document,
%% possibly resulting in unexpected article over length charges.
%%
%% ******* WARNING! *******


% 9pt option defaults
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine
\typeout{-- This is a 9 point document.}
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9}{11.0476pt}}
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.0476pt}
\normalsize
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 3pt minus 1pt
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 3pt
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 3pt minus 1pt
\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{8.5}{10pt}}
\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}}
\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}}
\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}}
% sublargesize is the same as large - 10pt
\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{10}{12pt}}
\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{10}{12pt}}
\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{12}{14pt}}
\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{14}{17pt}}
\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{17}{20pt}}
\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{20}{24pt}}
\fi
%
% 10pt option defaults
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten
\typeout{-- This is a 10 point document.}
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10}{12.00pt}}
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{12pt}
\normalsize
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 4pt minus 2pt
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 4pt
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 4pt minus 2pt
\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{9}{10pt}}
\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}}
\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}}
\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}}
% sublargesize is a tad smaller than large - 11pt
\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{11}{13.4pt}}
\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}}
\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}}
\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}}
\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}}
\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}}
\fi
%
% 11pt option defaults
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven
\typeout{-- This is an 11 point document.}
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11}{13.3846pt}}
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.3846pt}
\normalsize
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 5pt minus 3pt
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 5pt
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 5pt minus 3pt
\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}}
\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}}
\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}}
\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}}
% sublargesize is the same as large - 12pt
\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{12}{14pt}}
\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}}
\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}}
\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}}
\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}}
\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}}
\fi
%
% 12pt option defaults
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve
\typeout{-- This is a 12 point document.}
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12}{13.92pt}}
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.92pt}
\normalsize
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 6pt minus 4pt
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 6pt
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 6pt minus 4pt
\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}}
\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}}
\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}}
\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}}
% sublargesize is the same as large - 14pt
\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{14}{17pt}}
\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{14}{17pt}}
\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{17}{20pt}}
\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{20}{24pt}}
\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{22}{26pt}}
\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}}
\fi



% V1.8a compsoc font sizes
% compsoc font sizes use bp "Postscript" point units (1/72in) 
% rather than the traditional pt (1/72.27)
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
% -- compsoc defaults --
% ** will override some of these values later **
% 9pt
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9bp}{11bp}}
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11bp}
\normalsize
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
\abovedisplayshortskip 0bp plus 3bp
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp
\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{8.5bp}{10bp}}
\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8bp}{9bp}}
\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7bp}{8bp}}
\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5bp}{6bp}}
% sublargesize is the same as large - 10bp
\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{10bp}{12bp}}
\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{10bp}{12bp}}
\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{12bp}{14bp}}
\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{14bp}{17bp}}
\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{17bp}{20bp}}
\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{20bp}{24bp}}
\fi
%
% 10pt
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10bp}{12bp}}
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{12bp}
\normalsize
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 4bp
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp
\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{9bp}{10bp}}
\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8bp}{9bp}}
\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7bp}{8bp}}
\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5bp}{6bp}}
% sublargesize is a tad smaller than large - 11bp
\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{11bp}{13.5bp}}
\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12bp}{14bp}}
\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14bp}{17bp}}
\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17bp}{20bp}}
\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20bp}{24bp}}
\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24bp}{28bp}}
\fi
%
% 11pt
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11bp}{13.5bp}}
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.5bp}
\normalsize
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 5bp
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp
\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10bp}{12bp}}
\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9bp}{10.5bp}}
\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8bp}{9bp}}
\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6bp}{7bp}}
% sublargesize is the same as large - 12bp
\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{12bp}{14bp}}
\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12bp}{14bp}}
\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14bp}{17bp}}
\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17bp}{20bp}}
\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20bp}{24bp}}
\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24bp}{28bp}}
\fi
%
% 12pt
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12bp}{14bp}}%
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{14bp}%
\normalsize
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 6bp
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp
\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10bp}{12bp}}
\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9bp}{10.5bp}}
\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8bp}{9bp}}
\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6bp}{7bp}}
% sublargesize is the same as large - 14bp
\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{14bp}{17bp}}
\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{14bp}{17bp}}
\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{17bp}{20bp}}
\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{20bp}{24bp}}
\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{22bp}{26bp}}
\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24bp}{28bp}}
\fi
%
% -- override defaults: compsoc journals use special normalsizes --
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
% 
% compsoc conferences
% 9pt
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9bp}{10.8bp}}
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{10.8bp}
\normalsize
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
\abovedisplayshortskip 0bp plus 3bp
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp
\fi
% 10pt
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10bp}{11.2bp}}
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.2bp}
\normalsize
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 4bp
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp
\fi
% 11pt
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11bp}{13.2bp}}
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.2bp}
\normalsize
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 5bp
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp
\fi
% 12pt
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12bp}{14.4bp}}
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{14.4bp}
\normalsize
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 6bp
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp
\fi
% 
% compsoc nonconferences
\else
% 9pt
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9bp}{10.8bp}}
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{10.8bp}
\normalsize
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
\abovedisplayshortskip 0bp plus 3bp
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 3bp minus 1bp
\fi
% 10pt
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten
% the official spec is 9.5bp with 11.4bp leading for 10pt,
% but measurements of proofs suggest upto 11.723bp leading
% here we'll use 11.54bp which gives 61 lines per column
% with the standard compsoc margins
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9.5bp}{11.54bp}}
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.54bp}
\normalsize
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 4bp
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 4bp minus 2bp
\fi
% 11pt
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11bp}{13.2bp}}
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.2bp}
\normalsize
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 5bp
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 5bp minus 3bp
\fi
% 12pt
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve
\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12bp}{14.4bp}}
\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{14.4bp}
\normalsize
\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp
\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus 6bp
\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus 6bp minus 4bp
\fi
\fi\fi




% V1.6 The Computer Modern Fonts will issue a substitution warning for
% 24pt titles (24.88pt is used instead, but the default and correct
% Times font will scale exactly as needed) increase the substitution
% tolerance to turn off this warning.
% 
% V1.8a, the compsoc bp font sizes can also cause bogus font substitution
% warnings with footnote or scriptsize math and the $\bullet$ itemized
% list of \IEEEcompsocitemizethanks. So, increase this to 1.5pt or more.
\def\fontsubfuzz{1.7bp}


% warn the user in case they forget to use the 9pt option with
% technote
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%
 \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\else%
  \typeout{** ATTENTION: Technotes are normally 9pt documents.}%
 \fi%
\fi


% V1.7
% Improved \textunderscore to provide a much better fake _ when used with
% OT1 encoding. Under OT1, detect use of pcr or cmtt \ttfamily and use
% available true _ glyph for those two typewriter fonts.
\def\@IEEEstringptm{ptm} % Times Roman family
\def\@IEEEstringppl{ppl} % Palatino Roman family
\def\@IEEEstringphv{phv} % Helvetica Sans Serif family
\def\@IEEEstringpcr{pcr} % Courier typewriter family
\def\@IEEEstringcmtt{cmtt} % Computer Modern typewriter family
\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textunderscore}{\leavevmode
\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringpcr\string_\else
\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringcmtt\string_\else
\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringptm\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else
\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringppl\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else
\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringphv\kern -0.03em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.62em\@height 0.52pt\kern -0.33ex}\kern -0.03em\else
\kern 0.09em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.6em\@height 0.44pt\kern -0.63pt\kern -0.42ex}\kern 0.09em\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\relax}




% set the default \baselinestretch
\def\baselinestretch{1}
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
  \def\baselinestretch{1.5}% default baselinestretch for draft modes
\fi 


% process CLASSINPUT baselinestretch
\ifx\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch\@IEEEundefined
\else
  \edef\baselinestretch{\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch} % user CLASSINPUT override
  \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding \string\baselinestretch\space to
           \baselinestretch\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.}
\fi

\small\normalsize % make \baselinestretch take affect




% store the normalsize baselineskip
\newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip
\CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip=\baselineskip\relax
% and the normalsize unity (baselinestretch=1) baselineskip
% we could save a register by giving the user access to
% \@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip. However, let's protect
% its read only internal status
\newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
\CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\relax
% store the nominal value of jot
\newdimen\IEEEnormaljot
\IEEEnormaljot=0.25\baselineskip\relax

% set \jot
\jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax




% V1.6, we are now going to fine tune the interword spacing
% The default interword glue for Times under TeX appears to use a
% nominal interword spacing of 25% (relative to the font size, i.e., 1em)
% a maximum of 40% and a minimum of 19%.
% For example, 10pt text uses an interword glue of:
% 
% 2.5pt plus 1.49998pt minus 0.59998pt
% 
% However, the IEEE allows for a more generous range which reduces the need
% for hyphenation, especially for two column text. Furthermore, the IEEE
% tends to use a little bit more nominal space between the words.
% The IEEE's interword spacing percentages appear to be:
% 35% nominal
% 23% minimum
% 50% maximum
% (They may even be using a tad more for the largest fonts such as 24pt.)
% 
% for bold text, the IEEE increases the spacing a little more:
% 37.5% nominal
% 23% minimum
% 55% maximum

% here are the interword spacing ratios we'll use
% for medium (normal weight)
\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioM{0.35}
\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM{0.23}
\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM{0.50}

% for bold
\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioB{0.375}
\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB{0.23}
\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB{0.55}


% compsoc nonconference papers use Palatino,
% tweak settings to better match the proofs
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else
% for medium (normal weight)
\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioM{0.28}
\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM{0.21}
\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM{0.47}
% for bold
\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioB{0.305}
\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB{0.21}
\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB{0.52}
\fi\fi


% command to revise the interword spacing for the current font under TeX:
% \fontdimen2 = nominal interword space
% \fontdimen3 = interword stretch
% \fontdimen4 = interword shrink
% since all changes to the \fontdimen are global, we can enclose these commands
% in braces to confine any font attribute or length changes
\def\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens#1#2#3{{%
\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\f@size pt}% grab the font size in pt, could use 1em instead.
\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
\fontdimen2\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
\fontdimen3\font=-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
\fontdimen4\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax}}

% revise the interword spacing for each font weight
\def\@@IEEEsetfontdimens{{%
\mdseries
\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM}%
\bfseries
\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB}%
}}

% revise the interword spacing for each font shape
% \slshape is not often used for IEEE work and is not altered here. The \scshape caps are
% already a tad too large in the free LaTeX fonts (as compared to what the IEEE uses) so we
% won't alter these either.
\def\@IEEEsetfontdimens{{%
\normalfont
\@@IEEEsetfontdimens
\normalfont\itshape
\@@IEEEsetfontdimens
}}

% command to revise the interword spacing for each font size (and shape
% and weight). Only the \rmfamily is done here as \ttfamily uses a 
% fixed spacing and \sffamily is not used as the main text of IEEE papers.
\def\@IEEEtunefonts{{\selectfont\rmfamily
\tiny\@IEEEsetfontdimens
\scriptsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
\footnotesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
\small\@IEEEsetfontdimens
\normalsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
\sublargesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
\large\@IEEEsetfontdimens
\LARGE\@IEEEsetfontdimens
\huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens
\Huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens}}

% if the nofonttune class option is not given, revise the interword spacing
% now - in case IEEEtran makes any default length measurements, and make
% sure all the default fonts are loaded
\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else
\@IEEEtunefonts
\fi

% and again at the start of the document in case the user loaded different fonts
\AtBeginDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else\@IEEEtunefonts\fi}





% -- V1.8a page setup commands --

% The default sample text for calculating margins
% Note that IEEE publications use \scriptsize for headers and footers.
\def\IEEEdefaultsampletext{\normalfont\normalsize gT}
\def\IEEEdefaultheadersampletext{\normalfont\scriptsize T}% IEEE headers default to uppercase
\def\IEEEdefaultfootersampletext{\normalfont\scriptsize gT}



% usage: \IEEEsettextwidth{inner margin}{outer margin}
% Sets \textwidth to allow the specified inner and outer margins
% for the current \paperwidth.
\def\IEEEsettextwidth#1#2{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\paperwidth
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB#1\relax
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB#2\relax
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
\textwidth\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}



% usage: \IEEEsetsidemargin{mode: i, o, c, a}{margin/offset}
% Sets \oddsidemargin and \evensidemargin to yield the specified margin
% of the given mode.
% The available modes are:
% i = inner margin
% o = outer margin
% c = centered, with the given offset
% a = adjust the margins using the given offset
% For the offsets, positive values increase the inner margin.
% \textwidth should be set properly for the given margins before calling this
% function.
\def\IEEEsetsidemargin#1#2{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #2\relax
\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax
% check for mode errors
\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty
  \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
  Defaulting to `i'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space are: i, o, c and a.}\relax
  \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=i\relax
  \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{i}\relax
\else
  \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
    \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
  \fi
\fi
% handle each mode
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax
  \advance\oddsidemargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
\else
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax
  \oddsidemargin\paperwidth
  \advance\oddsidemargin by -\textwidth
  \divide\oddsidemargin by 2\relax
  \advance\oddsidemargin by -1in\relax
  \advance\oddsidemargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
\else
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken o\relax
  \oddsidemargin\paperwidth
  \advance\oddsidemargin by -\textwidth
  \advance\oddsidemargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
  \advance\oddsidemargin by -1in\relax
\else
  \if\@IEEEextractedtoken i\relax
  \else
    \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
    Defaulting to `i'}%
    {Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetsidemargin\space are: i, o, c  and a.}%
  \fi
  \oddsidemargin\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
  \advance\oddsidemargin by -1in\relax
\fi\fi\fi
% odd and even side margins both mean "inner" for single sided pages
\evensidemargin\oddsidemargin
% but are mirrors of each other when twosided is in effect
\if@twoside
  \evensidemargin\paperwidth
  \advance\evensidemargin by -\textwidth
  \advance\evensidemargin by -\oddsidemargin
  % have to compensate for both the builtin 1in LaTex offset
  % and the fact we already subtracted this offset from \oddsidemargin
  \advance\evensidemargin -2in\relax
\fi}



% usage: \IEEEsettextheight[sample text]{top text margin}{bottom text margin}
% Sets \textheight based on the specified top margin and bottom margin.
% Takes into consideration \paperheight, \topskip, and (by default) the
% the actual height and depth of the \IEEEdefaultsampletext text. 
\def\IEEEsettextheight{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsettextheight}{\@IEEEsettextheight[\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}}
\def\@IEEEsettextheight[#1]#2#3{\textheight\paperheight\relax
  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #2\relax
  \advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% subtract top margin
  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #3\relax
  \advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% subtract bottom margin
  \advance \textheight by \topskip% add \topskip
  % subtract off everything above the top, and below the bottom, baselines
  \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  \advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
  \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  \advance \textheight by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}



\newdimen\IEEEquantizedlength
\IEEEquantizedlength 0sp\relax
\newdimen\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff
\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff 0sp\relax
\def\IEEEquantizedlengthint{0}

% usage: \IEEEquantizelength{mode: d, c, i}{base unit}{length}
% Sets the length \IEEEquantizedlength to be an integer multiple of the given
% (nonzero) base unit such that \IEEEquantizedlength approximates the given
% length.
% \IEEEquantizedlengthdiff is a length equal to the difference between the
% \IEEEquantizedlength and the given length.
% \IEEEquantizedlengthint is a macro containing the integer number of base units
% in \IEEEquantizedlength.
% i.e., \IEEEquantizedlength =  \IEEEquantizedlengthint * base unit
% The mode determines how \IEEEquantizedlength is quantized:
% d = always decrease (always round down \IEEEquantizeint)
% c = use the closest match
% i = always increase (always round up \IEEEquantizeint)
% In anycase, if the given length is already quantized,
% \IEEEquantizedlengthdiff will be set to zero.
\def\IEEEquantizelength#1#2#3{\begingroup
% work in isolation so as not to externally disturb the \@IEEEtrantmp
% variables
% load the argument values indirectly via \IEEEquantizedlengthdiff
% in case the user refers to our \@IEEEtrantmpdimenX, \IEEEquantizedlength,
% etc. in the arguments. we also will work with these as counters,
% i.e., in sp units
% A has the base unit
\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff #2\relax\relax\relax\relax
\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff
% B has the input length
\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff #3\relax\relax\relax\relax
\@IEEEtrantmpcountB\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountB sp\relax
% \@IEEEtrantmpcountC will have the quantized int
% \IEEEquantizedlength will have the quantized length
% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC will have the quantized diff
% initialize them to zero as this is what will be
% exported if an error occurs
\@IEEEtrantmpcountC 0\relax
\IEEEquantizedlength 0sp\relax
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC 0sp\relax
% extract mode
\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax
% check for mode errors
\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty
  \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEquantizelength\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
  Defaulting to `d'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEquantizelength\space are: d, c and i.}\relax
  \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=d\relax
  \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{d}\relax
\else
  \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
    \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEquantizelength\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
  \fi
\fi
% check for base unit is zero error
\ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=0\relax
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Base unit is zero in \string\IEEEquantizelength\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
  \string\IEEEquantizedlength\space and \string\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff\space are set to zero}{Division by zero is not allowed.}\relax
\else% base unit is nonzero
  % \@IEEEtrantmpcountC carries the number of integer units
  % in the quantized length (integer length \ base)
  \@IEEEtrantmpcountC\@IEEEtrantmpcountB\relax
  \divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax
  % \IEEEquantizedlength has the (rounded down) quantized length
  % = base * int
  \IEEEquantizedlength\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
  \multiply\IEEEquantizedlength by \@IEEEtrantmpcountC\relax
  % \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC has the difference
  % = quantized length - length
  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\IEEEquantizedlength\relax
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
  % trap special case of length being already quantized
  % to avoid a roundup under i option
  \ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC=0sp\relax
  \else % length not is already quantized
    % set dimenA to carry the upper quantized (absolute value) difference:
    % quantizedlength + base - length
    \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \IEEEquantizedlength\relax
    \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
    % set dimenB to carry the lower quantized (absolute value) difference:
    % length - quantizedlength
    \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\IEEEquantizedlength\relax
    % handle each mode
    \if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax
      % compare upper and lower amounts, select upper if lower > upper
      \ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB>\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
        % use upper
        \advance\IEEEquantizedlength by \the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax
        \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by 1\relax
        \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
      \else% <=. uselower
        % no need to do anything for lower, use output values already setup
      \fi
    \else% not mode c
    \if\@IEEEextractedtoken i\relax
      % always round up under i mode
      \advance\IEEEquantizedlength by \the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax
      \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by 1\relax
      \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
    \else
      \if\@IEEEextractedtoken d\relax
      \else
        \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEquantizelength\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
        Defaulting to `d'}%
        {Valid modes for \string\IEEEquantizelength\space are: d, c, and i.}\relax
      \fi % if d
      % no need to do anything for d, use output values already setup
    \fi\fi % if i, c
  \fi % if length is already quantized
\fi% if base unit is zero
% globally assign the results to macros we use here to escape the enclosing
% group without needing to call \global on any of the \@IEEEtrantmp variables.
% \@IEEEtrantmpcountC has the quantized int
% \IEEEquantizedlength has the quantized length
% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC has the quantized diff
\xdef\@IEEEquantizedlengthintmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax
\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlength\relax
\xdef\@IEEEquantizedlengthmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax
\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC\relax
\xdef\@IEEEquantizedlengthdiffmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax
\endgroup
% locally assign the outputs here from the macros
\expandafter\IEEEquantizedlength\@IEEEquantizedlengthmacro sp\relax
\expandafter\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff\@IEEEquantizedlengthdiffmacro sp\relax
\edef\IEEEquantizedlengthint{\@IEEEquantizedlengthintmacro}\relax}



\newdimen\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff
\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff 0sp\relax

% usage: \IEEEquantizetextheight[base unit]{mode: d, c, i}
% Sets \textheight to be an integer multiple of the current \baselineskip
% (or the optionally specified base unit) plus the first (\topskip) line.
% \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff is a length equal to the difference between
% the new quantized and original \textheight.
% \IEEEquantizedtextheightlpc is a macro containing the integer number of
% lines per column under the quantized \textheight. i.e.,
% \textheight = \IEEEquantizedtextheightlpc * \baselineskip + \topskip
% The mode determines how \textheight is quantized:
% d = always decrease (always round down the number of lines per column)
% c = use the closest match
% i = always increase (always round up the number of lines per column)
% In anycase, if \textheight is already quantized, it will remain unchanged,
% and \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff will be set to zero.
% Depends on: \IEEEquantizelength
\def\IEEEquantizetextheight{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEquantizetextheight}{\@IEEEquantizetextheight[\baselineskip]}}
\def\@IEEEquantizetextheight[#1]#2{\begingroup
% use our \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff as a scratch pad
% we need to subtract off \topskip before quantization
\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff\textheight
\advance\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff by -\topskip\relax
\IEEEquantizelength{#2}{#1}{\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff}
% add back \topskip line
\advance\IEEEquantizedlength by \topskip
\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlengthint\relax
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountC by 1\relax
% globally assign the results to macros we use here to escape the enclosing
% group without needing to call \global on any of the \@IEEEtrantmp variables.
\xdef\@IEEEquantizedtextheightlpcmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax
\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlength\relax
\xdef\@IEEEquantizedtextheightmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax
\@IEEEtrantmpcountC\IEEEquantizedlengthdiff\relax
\xdef\@IEEEquantizedtextheightdiffmacro{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountC}\relax
\endgroup
% locally assign the outputs here from the macros
\textheight\@IEEEquantizedtextheightmacro sp\relax
\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff\@IEEEquantizedtextheightdiffmacro sp\relax
\edef\IEEEquantizedtextheightlpc{\@IEEEquantizedtextheightlpcmacro}}



% usage: \IEEEsettopmargin[sample text]{mode: t, b, c, a, q}{margin/offset}
% Sets \topmargin based on the specified vertical margin.
% Takes into consideration the base 1in offset, \headheight, \headsep,
% \topskip, and (by default) the the actual height (or, for the bottom, depth)
% of the \IEEEdefaultsampletext text.
% The available modes are:
% t = top margin
% b = bottom margin
% c = vertically centered, with the given offset
% a = adjust the vertical margins using the given offset
% q = adjust the margins using \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff and the given offset
% For the offsets, positive values increase the top margin.
% \headheight, \headsep, \topskip and \textheight should be set properly for the
% given margins before calling this function.
\def\IEEEsettopmargin{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsettopmargin}{\@IEEEsettopmargin[\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}}
\def\@IEEEsettopmargin[#1]#2#3{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #3\relax
\@IEEEextracttoken{#2}\relax
% check for mode errors
\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty
  \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
  Defaulting to `t'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space are: t, b, c, a and q.}\relax
  \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=t\relax
  \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{t}\relax
\else
  \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
    \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
  \fi
\fi
% handle each mode
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax
  \advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
\else
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken q\relax
  % we need to adjust by half the \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff value
  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff\relax
  \divide\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by 2\relax
  % a positive \IEEEquantizedtextheightdiff means we need to reduce \topmargin
  % because \textheight has been lenghtened
  \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
  \advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
\else
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax
  \topmargin\paperheight
  \advance\topmargin by -\textheight
  % \textheight includes \topskip, but we should not count topskip whitespace here, backout
  \advance \topmargin by \topskip
  \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
  \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
  \divide\topmargin by 2\relax
  \advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
\else
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken b\relax
  \topmargin\paperheight
  \advance\topmargin by -\textheight
  % \textheight includes \topskip, but we should not count topskip whitespace here, backout
  \advance \topmargin by \topskip
  \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
  \advance\topmargin by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
\else
  \if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax
  \else
    \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
    Defaulting to `t'}%
    {Valid modes for \string\IEEEsettopmargin\space are: t, b, c, a and q.}\relax
  \fi
  \topmargin\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
  \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  \advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
\fi\fi % if t, b, c
% convert desired top margin into actual \topmargin
% this is not done for the q or a modes because they are only adjustments
\advance \topmargin by -\topskip
\advance \topmargin by -1in
\advance \topmargin by -\headheight
\advance \topmargin by -\headsep
\fi\fi % if q, a
}



% usage: \IEEEsetheadermargin[header sample][text sample]{mode: t, b, c, a}{margin/offset}
% Differentially adjusts \topmargin and \headsep (such that their sum is unchanged)
% based on the specified header margin.
% Takes into consideration the base 1in offset, \headheight, \topskip, and (by default)
% the actual height (or depth) of the \IEEEdefaultheadersampletext and
% \IEEEdefaultsampletext text.
% The available modes are:
% t = top margin (top of the header text to the top of the page)
% b = bottom margin (bottom of the header text to the top of the main text)
% c = vertically centered between the main text and the top of the page,
%     with the given offset
% a = adjust the vertical position using the given offset
% For the offsets, positive values move the header downward.
% \headheight, \headsep, \topskip and \topmargin should be set properly before
% calling this function.
\def\IEEEsetheadermargin{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsetheadermargin}{\@IEEEsetheadermargin[\IEEEdefaultheadersampletext]}}
\def\@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1]{\@ifnextchar [{\@@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1]}{\@@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1][\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}}
\def\@@IEEEsetheadermargin[#1][#2]#3#4{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #4\relax
\@IEEEextracttoken{#3}\relax
% check for mode errors
\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty
  \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
  Defaulting to `t'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space are: t, b, c, and a.}\relax
  \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=t\relax
  \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{t}\relax
\else
  \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
    \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
  \fi
\fi
% handle each mode
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax
  % No need to do anything here and can pass through the adjustment
  % value as is. The end adjustment of \topmargin and \headsep will
  % do all that is needed
\else
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax
  % get the bottom margin
  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax
  \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \topskip
  \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
  % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual header bottom margin
  % subtract from it the top header margin
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB -1in\relax % take into consideration the system 1in offset of the top margin
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\topmargin
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\headheight
  \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
  % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the difference between the bottom and top margins
  % we need to adjust by half this amount to center the header
  \divide\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by 2\relax
  % and add to offset
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
\else
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken b\relax
  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax
  \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \topskip
  \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
  % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual header bottom margin
  % get the difference between the actual and the desired
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
\else
  \if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax
  \else
    \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
    Defaulting to `t'}%
    {Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetheadermargin\space are: t, b, c and a.}\relax
  \fi
  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 1in\relax % take into consideration the system 1in offset of the top margin
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \topmargin
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \headheight
  \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
  % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual header top margin
  % get the difference between the desired and the actual
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
\fi\fi % if t, b, c
\fi % if a
% advance \topmargin by the needed amount and reduce \headsep by the same
% so as not to disturb the location of the main text
\advance\topmargin by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
\advance\headsep by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
}



% usage: \IEEEsetfootermargin[footer sample][text sample]{mode: t, b, c, a}{margin/offset}
% Adjusts \footskip based on the specified footer margin.
% Takes into consideration the base 1in offset, \paperheight, \headheight,
% \headsep, \textheight and (by default) the actual height (or depth) of the
% \IEEEdefaultfootersampletext and \IEEEdefaultsampletext text.
% The available modes are:
% t = top margin (top of the footer text to the bottom of the main text)
% b = bottom margin (bottom of the footer text to the bottom of page)
% c = vertically centered between the main text and the bottom of the page,
%     with the given offset
% a = adjust the vertical position using the given offset
% For the offsets, positive values move the footer downward.
% \headheight, \headsep, \topskip, \topmargin, and \textheight should be set
% properly before calling this function.
\def\IEEEsetfootermargin{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEsetfootermargin}{\@IEEEsetfootermargin[\IEEEdefaultfootersampletext]}}
\def\@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1]{\@ifnextchar [{\@@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1]}{\@@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1][\IEEEdefaultsampletext]}}
\def\@@IEEEsetfootermargin[#1][#2]#3#4{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA #4\relax
\@IEEEextracttoken{#3}\relax
% check for mode errors
\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro\@empty
  \@IEEEclspkgerror{Empty mode type in \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
  Defaulting to `t'}{Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space are: t, b, c, and a.}\relax
  \let\@IEEEextractedtoken=t\relax
  \def\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro{t}\relax
\else
  \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
    \typeout{** WARNING: \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space mode specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
  \fi
\fi
% handle each mode
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken a\relax
  % No need to do anything here and can pass through the adjustment
  % value as is. The end adjustment of \footskip will do all that
  % is needed
\else
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax
  % calculate the bottom margin
  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 1in\relax % system 1in offset
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\topmargin\relax
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headheight\relax
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\textheight\relax
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\footskip\relax
  \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\paperheight
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
  % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual footer bottom margin
  % now subtract off the footer top margin
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB -\footskip\relax
  \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
  \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
  % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the difference between the bottom
  % and top footer margins
  % our adjustment must be half this value to center the footer
  \divide\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by 2\relax
  % add to the offset
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
\else
\if\@IEEEextractedtoken b\relax
  % calculate the bottom margin
  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 1in\relax % system 1in offset
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\topmargin\relax
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headheight\relax
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\headsep\relax
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\textheight\relax
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\footskip\relax
  \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\paperheight
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
  % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual footer bottom margin
  % get the difference between the actual and the desired
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
\else
  \if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax
  \else
    \@IEEEclspkgerror{Unknown mode type `\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro' in \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space (line \the\inputlineno).\MessageBreak
    Defaulting to `t'}%
    {Valid modes for \string\IEEEsetfootermargin\space are: t, b, c and a.}\relax
  \fi
  \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\footskip\relax
  \settodepth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #2\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
  \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC}{\begingroup #1\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}\relax
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenC
  % at this point \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB has the actual footer top margin
  % get the difference between the desired and the actual
  \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
\fi\fi % if t, b, c
\fi % if a
% advance \footskip by the needed amount
\advance\footskip by \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
}

% -- End V1.8a page setup commands --





% V1.6
% LaTeX is a little to quick to use hyphenations
% So, we increase the penalty for their use and raise
% the badness level that triggers an underfull hbox
% warning. The author may still have to tweak things,
% but the appearance will be much better "right out
% of the box" than that under V1.5 and prior.
% TeX default is 50
\hyphenpenalty=750
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
\hyphenpenalty 500
\fi
% If we didn't adjust the interword spacing, 2200 might be better.
% The TeX default is 1000
\hbadness=1350
% The IEEE does not use extra spacing after punctuation
\frenchspacing

% V1.7 increase this a tad to discourage equation breaks
\binoppenalty=1000 % default 700
\relpenalty=800     % default 500

% v1.8a increase these to discourage widows and orphans
\clubpenalty=1000          % default 150
\widowpenalty=1000         % default 150
\displaywidowpenalty=1000 % default  50


% margin note stuff
\marginparsep      10pt
\marginparwidth    20pt
\marginparpush     25pt


% if things get too close, go ahead and let them touch
\lineskip            0pt
\normallineskip      0pt
\lineskiplimit       0pt
\normallineskiplimit 0pt

% The distance from the lower edge of the text body to the
% footline
\footskip 0.4in

% normally zero, should be relative to font height.
% put in a little rubber to help stop some bad breaks (underfull vboxes)
\parskip 0ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.1ex

\parindent    1.0em
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  \parindent    1.5em
\fi

\headheight   12pt
\headsep      18pt
% use the normal font baselineskip
% so that \topskip is unaffected by changes in \baselinestretch
\topskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip


% V1.8 \maxdepth defaults to 4pt, but should be font size dependent
\maxdepth=0.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
\textheight       58pc  % 9.63in, 696pt

% set the default top margin to 58pt
% which results in a \topmargin of -49.59pt for 10pt documents
\IEEEsettopmargin{t}{58pt}
% tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/column.
% standard is: 9pt/63 lpc; 10pt/58 lpc; 11pt/52 lpc; 12pt/50 lpc
\IEEEquantizetextheight{c}
% tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom
\IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp}


\columnsep         1pc
\textwidth        43pc   % 2 x 21pc + 1pc = 43pc

% set the default side margins to center the text
\IEEEsetsidemargin{c}{0pt}


% adjust margins for default conference mode
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
 \textheight        9.25in % The standard for conferences (668.4975pt)
 \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{0.75in}
 % tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.
 % standard is: 9pt/61 lpc; 10pt/56 lpc; 11pt/50 lpc; 12pt/48 lpc
 \IEEEquantizetextheight{c}
 % tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom
 \IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp}
\fi


% compsoc text sizes, margins and spacings
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
 \columnsep         12bp
 % CS specs for \textwdith are 6.875in
 % \textwidth         6.875in
 % however, measurements from proofs show they are using 3.5in columns
 \textwidth         7in
 \advance\textwidth by \columnsep
 % set the side margins to center the text
 \IEEEsetsidemargin{c}{0pt}
 % top/bottom margins to center
 % could just set \textheight to 9.75in for all the different paper sizes
 % and then quantize, but we'll do it the long way here to allow for easy
 % future per-paper size adjustments
 \IEEEsettextheight{0.625in}{0.625in}% 11in - 2 * 0.625in = 9.75in is the standard text height for compsoc journals
 \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{0.625in}
 \if@IEEEusingcspaper
   \IEEEsettextheight{0.5in}{0.5in}% 10.75in - 2 * 0.5in = 9.75in
   \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{0.5in}
 \fi
 \if@IEEEusingAfourpaper
   \IEEEsettextheight{24.675mm}{24.675mm}% 297mm - 2 * 24.675mm = 247.650mm (9.75in)
   \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{24.675mm}
 \fi
 % tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.
 % standard is: 9pt/65 lpc; 10pt/61 lpc; 11pt/53 lpc; 12pt/49 lpc
 \IEEEquantizetextheight{c}
 % tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom
 \IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp}

% compsoc conference
 \ifCLASSOPTIONconference
  % compsoc conference use a larger value for columnsep
  \columnsep 0.25in
  \IEEEsettextwidth{0.75in}{0.75in}
  % set the side margins to center the text (0.75in for letterpaper)
  \IEEEsetsidemargin{c}{0pt}
  % compsoc conferences want 1in top and bottom margin
  \IEEEsettextheight{1in}{1in}
  \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{1in}
  % tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.
  % standard is: 9pt/58 lpc; 10pt/53 lpc; 11pt/48 lpc; 12pt/46 lpc
  \IEEEquantizetextheight{c}
  % tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom
  \IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp}
 \fi
\fi



% draft mode settings override that of all other modes
% provides a nice 1in margin all around the paper and extra
% space between the lines for editor's comments
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
  % we want 1in side margins regardless of paper type
  \IEEEsettextwidth{1in}{1in}
  \IEEEsetsidemargin{c}{0pt}
  % want 1in top and bottom margins
  \IEEEsettextheight{1in}{1in}
  \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{1in}
  % digitize textheight to be an integer number of lines.
  % this may cause the top and bottom margins to be off a tad
  \IEEEquantizetextheight{c}
  % tweak top margin so that the error is shared equally at the top and bottom
  \IEEEsettopmargin{q}{0sp}
\fi



% process CLASSINPUT inner/outer margin
% if inner margin defined, but outer margin not, set outer to inner.
\ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
\else
  \ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
    \edef\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
  \fi
\fi

\ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
\else
  % if outer margin defined, but inner margin not, set inner to outer.
  \ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
    \edef\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}
  \fi
  \IEEEsettextwidth{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}
  \IEEEsetsidemargin{i}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
  \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding inner side margin to \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\space and 
           outer side margin to \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.}
\fi



% process CLASSINPUT top/bottom text margin
% if toptext margin defined, but bottomtext margin not, set bottomtext to toptext margin
\ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined
\else
  \ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined
    \edef\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}
  \fi
\fi

\ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined
\else
  % if bottomtext margin defined, but toptext margin not, set toptext to bottomtext margin
  \ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined
    \edef\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin{\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin}
  \fi
  \IEEEsettextheight{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}{\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin}
  \IEEEsettopmargin{t}{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}
  \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding top text margin to \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\space and 
           bottom text margin to \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.}
\fi



% default to center header and footer text in the margins
\IEEEsetheadermargin{c}{0pt}
\IEEEsetfootermargin{c}{0pt}

% adjust header and footer positions for compsoc journals
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  \ifCLASSOPTIONjournal
    \IEEEsetheadermargin{b}{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}
    \IEEEsetfootermargin{t}{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}
  \fi
\fi


% V1.8a display lines per column info message on user's console
\def\IEEEdisplayinfolinespercolumn{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\textheight
% topskip represents only one line even if > baselineskip
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -1\topskip
\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
\@IEEEtrantmpcountB=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by \baselineskip
% need to add one line to include topskip (first) line
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by 1
% save lines per column value as text
\edef\@IEEEnumlinespercolumninfotxt{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountB}
% backout topskip advance to allow direct \@IEEEtrantmpcountA comparison
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by -1
% restore value as text height (without topskip) rather than just as number of lines
\multiply\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by \baselineskip
% is the column height an integer number of lines per column?
\ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpcountB
\edef\@IEEEnumlinespercolumnexactinfotxt{exact}
\else
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEtrantmpcountA sp\relax
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by -\@IEEEtrantmpcountB sp\relax
\edef\@IEEEnumlinespercolumnexactinfotxt{approximate, difference = \the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}
\fi
\typeout{-- Lines per column: \@IEEEnumlinespercolumninfotxt\space (\@IEEEnumlinespercolumnexactinfotxt).}}
% delay execution till start of document to allow for user changes
\AtBeginDocument{\IEEEdisplayinfolinespercolumn}



% LIST SPACING CONTROLS

% Controls the amount of EXTRA spacing
% above and below \trivlist 
% Both \list and IED lists override this.
% However, \trivlist will use this as will most
% things built from \trivlist like the \center
% environment.
\topsep           0.5\baselineskip

% Controls the additional spacing around lists preceded
% or followed by blank lines. the IEEE does not increase
% spacing before or after paragraphs so it is set to zero.
% \z@ is the same as zero, but faster.
\partopsep          \z@

% Controls the spacing between paragraphs in lists. 
% The IEEE does not increase spacing before or after paragraphs
% so this is also zero. 
% With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to
% this value DO affect lists (but not IED lists).
\parsep             \z@

% Controls the extra spacing between list items. 
% The IEEE does not put extra spacing between items.
% With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to this value DO affect
% lists (but not IED lists).
\itemsep            \z@

% \itemindent is the amount to indent the FIRST line of a list
% item. It is auto set to zero within the \list environment. To alter
% it, you have to do so when you call the \list.
% However, the IEEE uses this for the theorem environment
% There is an alternative value for this near \leftmargini below
\itemindent         -1em

% \leftmargin, the spacing from the left margin of the main text to
% the left of the main body of a list item is set by \list.
% Hence this statement does nothing for lists.
% But, quote and verse do use it for indention.
\leftmargin         2em

% we retain this stuff from the older IEEEtran.cls so that \list
% will work the same way as before. However, itemize, enumerate and
% description (IED) could care less about what these are as they
% all are overridden.
\leftmargini        2em
%\itemindent         2em  % Alternative values: sometimes used.
%\leftmargini        0em
\leftmarginii       1em
\leftmarginiii    1.5em
\leftmarginiv     1.5em
\leftmarginv      1.0em
\leftmarginvi     1.0em
\labelsep         0.5em 
\labelwidth         \z@


% The old IEEEtran.cls behavior of \list is retained.
% However, the new V1.3 IED list environments override all the
% @list stuff (\@listX is called within \list for the
% appropriate level just before the user's list_decl is called). 
% \topsep is now 2pt as the IEEE puts a little extra space around
% lists - used by those non-IED macros that depend on \list.
% Note that \parsep and \itemsep are not redefined as in 
% the sizexx.clo \@listX (which article.cls uses) so global changes
% of these values DO affect \list
% 
\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini \topsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt}
\let\@listI\@listi
\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii\labelwidth\leftmarginii%
    \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii\labelwidth\leftmarginiii%
    \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
\def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv\labelwidth\leftmarginiv%
    \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
\def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv\labelwidth\leftmarginv%
    \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
\def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi\labelwidth\leftmarginvi%
    \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}


% The IEEE uses 5) not 5.
\def\labelenumi{\theenumi)}     \def\theenumi{\arabic{enumi}}

% The IEEE uses a) not (a)
\def\labelenumii{\theenumii)}  \def\theenumii{\alph{enumii}}

% The IEEE uses iii) not iii.
\def\labelenumiii{\theenumiii)} \def\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}}

% The IEEE uses A) not A.
\def\labelenumiv{\theenumiv)}   \def\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}}

% exactly the same as in article.cls
\def\p@enumii{\theenumi}
\def\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)}
\def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}

% itemized list label styles
\def\labelitemi{$\scriptstyle\bullet$}
\def\labelitemii{\textbf{--}}
\def\labelitemiii{$\ast$}
\def\labelitemiv{$\cdot$}



% **** V1.3 ENHANCEMENTS ****
% Itemize, Enumerate and Description (IED) List Controls
% ***************************
% 
% 
% The IEEE seems to use at least two different values by
% which ITEMIZED list labels are indented to the right
% For The Journal of Lightwave Technology (JLT) and The Journal
% on Selected Areas in Communications (JSAC), they tend to use
% an indention equal to \parindent. For Transactions on Communications
% they tend to indent ITEMIZED lists a little more--- 1.3\parindent.
% We'll provide both values here for you so that you can choose 
% which one you like in your document using a command such as:
% setlength{\IEEEilabelindent}{\IEEEilabelindentB}
\newdimen\IEEEilabelindentA
\IEEEilabelindentA \parindent

\newdimen\IEEEilabelindentB
\IEEEilabelindentB 1.3\parindent
% However, we'll default to using \parindent
% which makes more sense to me
\newdimen\IEEEilabelindent
\IEEEilabelindent \IEEEilabelindentA


% This controls the default amount the enumerated list labels
% are indented to the right.
% Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention
\newdimen\IEEEelabelindent
\IEEEelabelindent \parindent

% This controls the default amount the description list labels
% are indented to the right.
% Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention
\newdimen\IEEEdlabelindent
\IEEEdlabelindent \parindent

% This is the value actually used within the IED lists.
% The IED environments automatically set its value to
% one of the three values above, so global changes do 
% not have any effect
\newdimen\IEEElabelindent
\IEEElabelindent \parindent

% The actual amount labels will be indented is
% \IEEElabelindent multiplied by the factor below
% corresponding to the level of nesting depth
% This provides a means by which the user can
% alter the effective \IEEElabelindent for deeper
% levels
% There may not be such a thing as correct "standard IEEE"
% values. What the IEEE actually does may depend on the specific
% circumstances.
% The first list level almost always has full indention.
% The second levels I've seen have only 75% of the normal indentation
% Three level or greater nestings are very rare. I am guessing
% that they don't use any indentation.
\def\IEEElabelindentfactori{1.0}   % almost always one
\def\IEEElabelindentfactorii{0.75} % 0.0 or 1.0 may be used in some cases
\def\IEEElabelindentfactoriii{0.0} % 0.75? 0.5? 0.0?
\def\IEEElabelindentfactoriv{0.0}
\def\IEEElabelindentfactorv{0.0}
\def\IEEElabelindentfactorvi{0.0}

% value actually used within IED lists, it is auto
% set to one of the 6 values above
% global changes here have no effect
\def\IEEElabelindentfactor{1.0}

% This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED
% list labels and the list text, when normal text is used for
% the labels.
% compsoc uses a larger value here, but we'll set that later
% in the class so that this code block area can be extracted
% as-is for IEEEtrantools.sty
\newdimen\IEEEiednormlabelsep
\IEEEiednormlabelsep 0.6em

% This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED
% list labels and the list text, when math symbols are used for
% the labels (nomenclature lists). The IEEE usually increases the 
% spacing in these cases
\newdimen\IEEEiedmathlabelsep
\IEEEiedmathlabelsep 1.2em

% This controls the extra vertical separation put above and
% below each IED list. the IEEE usually puts a little extra spacing
% around each list. However, this spacing is barely noticeable.
% compsoc uses a larger value here, but we'll set that later
% in the class so that this code block area can be extracted
% as-is for IEEEtrantools.sty
\newskip\IEEEiedtopsep
\IEEEiedtopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt


% This command is executed within each IED list environment
% at the beginning of the list. You can use this to set the 
% parameters for some/all your IED list(s) without disturbing 
% global parameters that affect things other than lists.
% i.e., renewcommand{\IEEEiedlistdecl}{\setlength{\labelsep}{5em}}
% will alter the \labelsep for the next list(s) until 
% \IEEEiedlistdecl is redefined. 
\def\IEEEiedlistdecl{\relax}

% This command provides an easy way to set \leftmargin based
% on the \labelwidth, \labelsep and the argument \IEEElabelindent
% Usage: \IEEEcalcleftmargin{width-to-indent-the-label}
% output is in the \leftmargin variable, i.e., effectively:
% \leftmargin = argument + \labelwidth + \labelsep
% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
\def\IEEEcalcleftmargin#1{\setlength{\leftmargin}{#1}%
\addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}%
\addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}}

% This command provides an easy way to set \labelwidth to the
% width of the given text. It is the same as
% \settowidth{\labelwidth}{label-text}
% and useful as a shorter alternative.
% Typically used to set \labelwidth to be the width
% of the longest label in the list
\def\IEEEsetlabelwidth#1{\settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1}}

% When this command is executed, IED lists will use the 
% IEEEiedmathlabelsep label separation rather than the normal
% spacing. To have an effect, this command must be executed via
% the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list
% environments.
\def\IEEEusemathlabelsep{\setlength{\labelsep}{\IEEEiedmathlabelsep}}

% A flag which controls whether the IED lists automatically
% calculate \leftmargin from \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and \labelsep
% Useful if you want to specify your own \leftmargin
% This flag must be set (\IEEEnocalcleftmargintrue or \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse) 
% via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list
% environments to have an effect.
\newif\ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin
\IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse

% A flag which controls whether \IEEElabelindent is multiplied by
% the \IEEElabelindentfactor for each list level.
% This flag must be set via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option 
% of the IED list environments to have an effect.
\newif\ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor
\IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse


% internal variable to indicate type of IED label
% justification
% 0 - left; 1 - center; 2 - right
\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}


% commands to allow the user to control IED
% label justifications. Use these commands within
% the IED environment option or in the \IEEEiedlistdecl
% Note that changing the normal list justifications
% is nonstandard and the IEEE may not like it if you do so!
% I include these commands as they may be helpful to
% those who are using these enhanced list controls for
% other non-IEEE related LaTeX work.
% itemize and enumerate automatically default to right
% justification, description defaults to left.
\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}}%left
\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{1}}%center
\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}}%right




% commands to save to and restore from the list parameter copies
% this allows us to set all the list parameters within
% the list_decl and prevent \list (and its \@list) 
% from overriding any of our parameters
% V1.6 use \edefs instead of dimen's to conserve dimen registers
% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
\def\@IEEEsavelistparams{\edef\@IEEEiedtopsep{\the\topsep}%
\edef\@IEEEiedlabelwidth{\the\labelwidth}%
\edef\@IEEEiedlabelsep{\the\labelsep}%
\edef\@IEEEiedleftmargin{\the\leftmargin}%
\edef\@IEEEiedpartopsep{\the\partopsep}%
\edef\@IEEEiedparsep{\the\parsep}%
\edef\@IEEEieditemsep{\the\itemsep}%
\edef\@IEEEiedrightmargin{\the\rightmargin}%
\edef\@IEEEiedlistparindent{\the\listparindent}%
\edef\@IEEEieditemindent{\the\itemindent}}

% Note controlled spacing here
\def\@IEEErestorelistparams{\topsep\@IEEEiedtopsep\relax%
\labelwidth\@IEEEiedlabelwidth\relax%
\labelsep\@IEEEiedlabelsep\relax%
\leftmargin\@IEEEiedleftmargin\relax%
\partopsep\@IEEEiedpartopsep\relax%
\parsep\@IEEEiedparsep\relax%
\itemsep\@IEEEieditemsep\relax%
\rightmargin\@IEEEiedrightmargin\relax%
\listparindent\@IEEEiedlistparindent\relax%
\itemindent\@IEEEieditemindent\relax}


% v1.6b provide original LaTeX IED list environments
% note that latex.ltx defines \itemize and \enumerate, but not \description
% which must be created by the base classes
% save original LaTeX itemize and enumerate
\let\LaTeXitemize\itemize
\let\endLaTeXitemize\enditemize
\let\LaTeXenumerate\enumerate
\let\endLaTeXenumerate\endenumerate

% provide original LaTeX description environment from article.cls
\newenvironment{LaTeXdescription}
               {\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin
                        \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}}
               {\endlist}
\newcommand*\descriptionlabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep
                                 \normalfont\bfseries #1}


% override LaTeX's default IED lists
\def\itemize{\@IEEEitemize}
\def\enditemize{\@endIEEEitemize}
\def\enumerate{\@IEEEenumerate}
\def\endenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate}
\def\description{\@IEEEdescription}
\def\enddescription{\@endIEEEdescription}

% provide the user with aliases - may help those using packages that
% override itemize, enumerate, or description
\def\IEEEitemize{\@IEEEitemize}
\def\endIEEEitemize{\@endIEEEitemize}
\def\IEEEenumerate{\@IEEEenumerate}
\def\endIEEEenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate}
\def\IEEEdescription{\@IEEEdescription}
\def\endIEEEdescription{\@endIEEEdescription}


% V1.6 we want to keep the IEEEtran IED list definitions as our own internal
% commands so they are protected against redefinition
\def\@IEEEitemize{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEitemize}{\@@IEEEitemize[\relax]}}
\def\@IEEEenumerate{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEenumerate}{\@@IEEEenumerate[\relax]}}
\def\@IEEEdescription{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEdescription}{\@@IEEEdescription[\relax]}}
\def\@endIEEEitemize{\endlist}
\def\@endIEEEenumerate{\endlist}
\def\@endIEEEdescription{\endlist}


% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS
% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS
% IEEEtran itemized list MDS 1/2001
% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
\def\@@IEEEitemize[#1]{%
                \ifnum\@itemdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else%
                \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else%
                \advance\@itemdepth\@ne%
                \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}%
                % get the IEEElabelindentfactor for this level
                \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be
                \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}%
                \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment
                \def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default
                % set other defaults
                \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse%
                \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse%
                \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep%
                \IEEElabelindent\IEEEilabelindent%
                \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep%
                \partopsep 0ex%
                \parsep 0ex%
                \itemsep 0ex%
                \rightmargin 0em%
                \listparindent 0em%
                \itemindent 0em%
                % calculate the label width
                % the user can override this later if
                % they specified a \labelwidth
                \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\csname labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth\endcsname}%
                \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters
                \list{\csname\@itemitem\endcsname}{%
                \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes
                                       % to our globals
                \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel
                \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters
                #1\relax%
                % If the user has requested not to use the
                % IEEElabelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent
                \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax%
                \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent%
                \fi%
                % Unless the user has requested otherwise,
                % calculate our left margin based
                % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and
                % \labelsep
                \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax%
                \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}%
                \fi}\fi\fi}%


% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS
% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS
% IEEEtran enumerate list MDS 1/2001
% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
\def\@@IEEEenumerate[#1]{%
                \ifnum\@enumdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else%
                \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else%
                \advance\@enumdepth\@ne%
                \edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}%
                % get the IEEElabelindentfactor for this level
                \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be
                \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}%
                \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment
                \def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default
                % set other defaults
                \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse%
                \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse%
                \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep%
                \IEEElabelindent\IEEEelabelindent%
                \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep%
                \partopsep 0ex%
                \parsep 0ex%
                \itemsep 0ex%
                \rightmargin 0em%
                \listparindent 0em%
                \itemindent 0em%
                % calculate the label width
                % We'll set it to the width suitable for all labels using
                % normalfont 1) to 9)
                % The user can override this later
                \settowidth{\labelwidth}{9)}%
                \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters
                \list{\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname}{\usecounter{\@enumctr}%
                \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes
                                       % to our globals
                \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel
                \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters 
                #1\relax%
                % If the user has requested not to use the
                % IEEElabelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent
                \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax%
                \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent%
                \fi%
                % Unless the user has requested otherwise,
                % calculate our left margin based
                % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and
                % \labelsep
                \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax%
                \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}%
                \fi}\fi\fi}%


% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS
% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS
% IEEEtran description list MDS 1/2001
% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
\def\@@IEEEdescription[#1]{%
                \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else%
                % get the IEEElabelindentfactor for this level
                \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be
                \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}%
                \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment
                \def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}% left justified labels are default
                % set other defaults
                \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse%
                \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse%
                \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% 
                \IEEElabelindent\IEEEdlabelindent%
                % assume normal labelsep
                \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep%
                \partopsep 0ex%
                \parsep 0ex%
                \itemsep 0ex%
                \rightmargin 0em%
                \listparindent 0em%
                \itemindent 0em%
                % Bogus label width in case the user forgets
                % to set it.
                % TIP: If you want to see what a variable's width is you
                % can use the TeX command \showthe\width-variable to 
                % display it on the screen during compilation 
                % (This might be helpful to know when you need to find out
                % which label is the widest)
                \settowidth{\labelwidth}{Hello}%
                \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters
                \list{}{\@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes
                                               % to our globals
                \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel
                \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters 
                #1\relax%
                % If the user has requested not to use the
                % labelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent
                \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax%
                \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent%
                \fi%
                % Unless the user has requested otherwise,
                % calculate our left margin based
                % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and
                % \labelsep
                \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax%
                \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}\relax%
                \fi}\fi}

% v1.6b we use one makelabel that does justification as needed.
\def\@IEEEiedmakelabel#1{\relax\if\@IEEEiedjustify 0\relax
\makebox[\labelwidth][l]{\normalfont #1}\else
\if\@IEEEiedjustify 1\relax
\makebox[\labelwidth][c]{\normalfont #1}\else
\makebox[\labelwidth][r]{\normalfont #1}\fi\fi}


% compsoc uses a larger value for the normal labelsep
% and also extra spacing above and below each list
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  \IEEEiednormlabelsep 1.2em
  \IEEEiedtopsep 6pt plus 3pt minus 3pt
\fi


% VERSE and QUOTE
% V1.7 define environments with newenvironment
\newenvironment{verse}{\let\\=\@centercr
    \list{}{\itemsep\z@ \itemindent -1.5em \listparindent \itemindent
    \rightmargin\leftmargin\advance\leftmargin 1.5em}\item\relax}
    {\endlist}
\newenvironment{quotation}{\list{}{\listparindent 1.5em \itemindent\listparindent
    \rightmargin\leftmargin \parsep 0pt plus 1pt}\item\relax}
    {\endlist}
\newenvironment{quote}{\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}\item\relax}
    {\endlist}


% \titlepage
% provided only for backward compatibility. \maketitle is the correct
% way to create the title page. 
\def\titlepage{\@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
    \else \newpage \fi \thispagestyle{empty}\c@page\z@}
\def\endtitlepage{\if@restonecol\twocolumn \else \newpage \fi}

% standard values from article.cls
\arraycolsep     5pt
\arrayrulewidth .4pt
\doublerulesep   2pt

\tabcolsep       6pt
\tabbingsep      0.5em


%% FOOTNOTES
%
%\skip\footins 10pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
% V1.6 respond to changes in font size
% space added above the footnotes (if present)
\skip\footins 0.9\baselineskip  plus 0.4\baselineskip  minus 0.2\baselineskip

% V1.6, we need to make \footnotesep responsive to changes
% in \baselineskip or strange spacings will result when in
% draft mode. Here is a little LaTeX secret - \footnotesep
% determines the height of an invisible strut that is placed
% *above* the baseline of footnotes after the first. Since
% LaTeX considers the space for characters to be 0.7\baselineskip
% above the baseline and 0.3\baselineskip below it, we need to
% use 0.7\baselineskip as a \footnotesep to maintain equal spacing
% between all the lines of the footnotes. The IEEE often uses a tad
% more, so use 0.8\baselineskip. This slightly larger value also helps
% the text to clear the footnote marks. Note that \thanks in IEEEtran
% uses its own value of \footnotesep which is set in \maketitle.
{\footnotesize
\global\footnotesep 0.8\baselineskip}


\skip\@mpfootins = \skip\footins
\fboxsep = 3pt
\fboxrule = .4pt
% V1.6 use 1em, then use LaTeX2e's \@makefnmark
% Note that the IEEE normally *left* aligns the footnote marks, so we don't need
% box resizing tricks here.
\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@makefnmark}#1}% V1.6 use 1em
% V1.7 compsoc does not use superscipts for footnote marks
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
\def\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark{\hbox{\normalfont\@thefnmark.\ }}
\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark}#1}
\fi

% The IEEE does not use footnote rules
\def\footnoterule{}

% V1.7 for compsoc, the IEEE uses a footnote rule only for \thanks. We devise a "one-shot"
% system to implement this.
\newif\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule
\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
\def\footnoterule{\relax\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule
\kern-5pt
\hbox to \columnwidth{\hfill\vrule width 0.5\columnwidth height 0.4pt\hfill}
\kern4.6pt
\global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse
\else
\relax
\fi}
\fi

% V1.6 do not allow LaTeX to break a footnote across multiple pages
\interfootnotelinepenalty=10000

% V1.6 discourage breaks within equations
% Note that amsmath normally sets this to 10000,
% but LaTeX2e normally uses 100.
\interdisplaylinepenalty=2500

% default allows section depth up to /paragraph
\setcounter{secnumdepth}{4}

% technotes do not allow /paragraph
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
   \setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}
\fi
% neither do compsoc conferences
\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}}


\newcounter{section}
\newcounter{subsection}[section]
\newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection]
\newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection]

% used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray as other packages may
% have their own, different, implementations
\newcounter{IEEEsubequation}[equation]

% as shown when called by user from \ref, \label and in table of contents
\def\theequation{\arabic{equation}}                          % 1
\def\theIEEEsubequation{\theequation\alph{IEEEsubequation}}  % 1a (used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray)
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
% compsoc is all arabic
\def\thesection{\arabic{section}}                
\def\thesubsection{\thesection.\arabic{subsection}}
\def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}}
\def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}}
\else
\def\thesection{\Roman{section}}                             % I
% V1.7, \mbox prevents breaks around - 
\def\thesubsection{\mbox{\thesection-\Alph{subsection}}}     % I-A
% V1.7 use I-A1 format used by the IEEE rather than I-A.1
\def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection\arabic{subsubsection}}  % I-A1
\def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection\alph{paragraph}}         % I-A1a
\fi

% From Heiko Oberdiek. Because of the \mbox in \thesubsection, we need to
% tell hyperref to disable the \mbox command when making PDF bookmarks.
% This done already with hyperref.sty version 6.74o and later, but
% it will not hurt to do it here again for users of older versions.
\@ifundefined{pdfstringdefPreHook}{\let\pdfstringdefPreHook\@empty}{}%
\g@addto@macro\pdfstringdefPreHook{\let\mbox\relax}


% Main text forms (how shown in main text headings)
% V1.6, using \thesection in \thesectiondis allows changes
% in the former to automatically appear in the latter
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference
    \def\thesectiondis{\thesection.}
    \def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis\arabic{subsection}.}
    \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis\arabic{subsubsection}.}
    \def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis\arabic{paragraph}.}
  \else% compsoc not conferencs
    \def\thesectiondis{\thesection}
    \def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis.\arabic{subsection}}
    \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis.\arabic{subsubsection}}
    \def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis.\arabic{paragraph}}
  \fi
\else% not compsoc
  \def\thesectiondis{\thesection.}                   % I.
  \def\thesubsectiondis{\Alph{subsection}.}          % B.
  \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\arabic{subsubsection})}  % 3)
  \def\theparagraphdis{\alph{paragraph})}            % d)
\fi

% just like LaTeX2e's \@eqnnum
\def\theequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theequation)}}% (1)
% IEEEsubequation used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray
\def\theIEEEsubequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theIEEEsubequation)}}% (1a)
% redirect LaTeX2e's equation number display and all that depend on
% it, through IEEEtran's \theequationdis
\def\@eqnnum{\theequationdis}



% V1.7 provide string macros as article.cls does
\def\contentsname{Contents}
\def\listfigurename{List of Figures}
\def\listtablename{List of Tables}
\def\refname{References}
\def\indexname{Index}
\def\figurename{Fig.}
\def\tablename{TABLE}
\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\figurename{Figure}}
\def\partname{Part}
\def\appendixname{Appendix}
\def\abstractname{Abstract}
% IEEE specific names
\def\IEEEkeywordsname{Index Terms}
\def\IEEEproofname{Proof}


% LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES AND TABLE OF CONTENTS
%
\def\@pnumwidth{1.55em}
\def\@tocrmarg{2.55em}
\def\@dotsep{4.5}
\setcounter{tocdepth}{3}

% adjusted some spacings here so that section numbers will not easily 
% collide with the section titles. 
% VIII; VIII-A; and VIII-A.1 are usually the worst offenders.
% MDS 1/2001
\def\tableofcontents{\section*{\contentsname}\@starttoc{toc}}
\def\l@section#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}\addvspace{1.0em plus 1pt}%
    \@tempdima 2.75em \begingroup \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth%
    \parfillskip-\@pnumwidth {\bfseries\leavevmode #1}\hfil\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par%
    \endgroup}
% argument format #1:level, #2:labelindent,#3:labelsep
\def\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{2.75em}{3.75em}}
\def\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{6.5em}{4.5em}}
% must provide \l@ defs for ALL sublevels EVEN if tocdepth
% is such as they will not appear in the table of contents
% these defs are how TOC knows what level these things are!
\def\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{6.5em}{5.5em}}
\def\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{6.5em}{6.5em}}
\def\listoffigures{\section*{\listfigurename}\@starttoc{lof}}
\def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{0em}{2.75em}}
\def\listoftables{\section*{\listtablename}\@starttoc{lot}}
\let\l@table\l@figure


% Definitions for floats
%
% Normal Floats
% V1.8 floatsep et al. revised down by 0.15\baselineskip
% to account for the sideeffects of \topskip compensation
\floatsep 0.85\baselineskip plus  0.2\baselineskip minus  0.2\baselineskip
\textfloatsep 1.55\baselineskip plus  0.2\baselineskip minus  0.4\baselineskip
\@fptop 0pt plus 1fil
\@fpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil
\@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil
\def\topfraction{0.9}
\def\bottomfraction{0.4}
\def\floatpagefraction{0.8}
% V1.7, let top floats approach 90% of page
\def\textfraction{0.1}

% Double Column Floats
\dblfloatsep 0.85\baselineskip plus  0.2\baselineskip minus  0.2\baselineskip

\dbltextfloatsep 1.55\baselineskip plus  0.2\baselineskip minus  0.4\baselineskip
% Note that it would be nice if the rubber here actually worked in LaTeX2e.
% There is a long standing limitation in LaTeX, first discovered (to the best
% of my knowledge) by Alan Jeffrey in 1992. LaTeX ignores the stretchable
% portion of \dbltextfloatsep, and as a result, double column figures can and
% do result in an non-integer number of lines in the main text columns with
% underfull vbox errors as a consequence. A post to comp.text.tex
% by Donald Arseneau confirms that this had not yet been fixed in 1998.
% IEEEtran V1.6 will fix this problem for you in the titles, but it doesn't
% protect you from other double floats. Happy vspace'ing.

\@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil
\@dblfpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil
\@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil
\def\dbltopfraction{0.8}
\def\dblfloatpagefraction{0.8}
\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{4}

\intextsep 0.85\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus  0.2\baselineskip
\setcounter{topnumber}{2}
\setcounter{bottomnumber}{2}
\setcounter{totalnumber}{4}



% article class provides these, we should too.
\newlength\abovecaptionskip
\newlength\belowcaptionskip
% but only \abovecaptionskip is used above figure captions and *below* table
% captions
\setlength\abovecaptionskip{0.5\baselineskip}
% compsoc journals are a little more generous
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONjournal
  \setlength\abovecaptionskip{0.75\baselineskip}
\fi\fi
\setlength\belowcaptionskip{0pt}
% V1.6 create hooks in case the caption spacing ever needs to be
% overridden by a user
\def\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}%
\def\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}%


% 1.6b revise caption system so that \@makecaption uses two arguments
% as with LaTeX2e. Otherwise, there will be problems when using hyperref.
\def\@IEEEtablestring{table}


% V1.8 compensate for \topskip so top of top figures align with tops of the first lines of main text
% here we calculate a space equal to the amount \topskip exceeds the main text height
% we hook in at \@floatboxreset
\def\@IEEEfiguretopskipspace{\ifdim\prevdepth=-1000pt\relax
\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{1\topskip}\relax
\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-0.7\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}\relax
\vspace*{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\fi}
% V1.8 compensate for \topskip at the top of top tables so caption text is on main text baseline
% use a strut set on the caption baseline within \@makecaption
\def\@IEEEtabletopskipstrut{\ifdim\prevdepth=-1000pt\rule{0pt}{\topskip}\fi}
% the \ifdim\prevdepth checks are always expected to be true for IEEE style float caption ordering
% because top of figure content and top of captions in tables is the first thing on the vertical
% list of these floats
% thanks to Donald Arseneau for his 2000/11/11 post "Re: caption hacking" with info on this topic.


\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
% V1.7 compsoc \@makecaption
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference
\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
% test if is a for a figure or table
\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring%
% if a table, do table caption
\footnotesize\bgroup\par\centering\@IEEEtabletopskipstrut{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace\scshape #2}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup%
\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace
% if not a table, format it as a figure
\else
\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace #2}%
\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize%
% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace}%
\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\footnotesize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%
% if caption is shorter than a line, center
\else%
\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
\fi\fi}
%
\else% nonconference compsoc
\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
% test if is a for a figure or table
\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring%
% if a table, do table caption
\footnotesize\bgroup\par\centering\@IEEEtabletopskipstrut{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize #1}\\{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize #2}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup%
\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace
% if not a table, format it as a figure
\else
\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace #2}%
\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize%
% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace}%
\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%
% if caption is shorter than a line, left justify
\else%
\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\footnotesize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
\fi\fi}
\fi
%
\else% traditional noncompsoc \@makecaption
\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
% test if is a for a figure or table
\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring%
% if a table, do table caption
\footnotesize\bgroup\par\centering\@IEEEtabletopskipstrut{\normalfont\footnotesize #1}\\{\normalfont\footnotesize\scshape #2}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup%
\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace
% if not a table, format it as a figure
\else
\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace
% 3/2001 use footnotesize, not small; use two nonbreaking spaces, not one
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace\nobreakspace #2}%
\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize%
% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}\nobreakspace\nobreakspace}%
\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\footnotesize\noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%
% if caption is shorter than a line, center if conference, left justify otherwise
\else%
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
\else \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
\fi\fi\fi}
\fi



% V1.7 disable captions class option, do so in a way that retains operation of \label
% within \caption
\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff
\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\vspace*{2em}\footnotesize\bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering{\footnotesize #1}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup%
\let\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave\label
\let\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax
\def\label##1{\gdef\@IEEEtemplabelargsave{##1}}%
\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#2}%
\let\label\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave
\ifx\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax\else\label{\@IEEEtemplabelargsave}\fi}
\fi


% V1.7 define end environments with \def not \let so as to work OK with
% preview-latex
\newcounter{figure}
\def\thefigure{\@arabic\c@figure}
\def\fps@figure{tbp}
\def\ftype@figure{1}
\def\ext@figure{lof}
\def\fnum@figure{\figurename\nobreakspace\thefigure}
% V1.8 within figures add \@IEEEfiguretopskipspace compensation to LaTeX2e's \@floatboxreset
\def\figure{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\normalsize\@setminipage\@IEEEfiguretopskipspace}\@float{figure}}
\def\endfigure{\end@float}
% V1.8 also add \@IEEEfiguretopskipspace compensation to \figure*
\@namedef{figure*}{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\normalsize\@setminipage\@IEEEfiguretopskipspace}\@dblfloat{figure}}
\@namedef{endfigure*}{\end@dblfloat}

\newcounter{table}
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
\def\thetable{\arabic{table}}
\else
\def\thetable{\@Roman\c@table}
\fi
\def\fps@table{tbp}
\def\ftype@table{2}
\def\ext@table{lot}
\def\fnum@table{\tablename\nobreakspace\thetable}
% V1.6 The IEEE uses 8pt text for tables
% within tables alter LaTeX2e's \@floatboxreset to use \footnotesize
\def\table{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@float{table}}
\def\endtable{\end@float}
% v1.6b double column tables need to default to footnotesize as well.
\@namedef{table*}{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@dblfloat{table}}
\@namedef{endtable*}{\end@dblfloat}




%% -- Command Argument Scanning Support Functions --
%% V1.8a 

% usage: \@IEEEstripouterbraces*{}
% \@IEEEstripouterbraces fully expands its argument (which it then stores
% in \@IEEEstripouterbracesarg) via \edef, then removes any outer enclosing
% braces, and finally stores the result in the macro
% \@IEEEstrippedouterbraces.
%
% For example:
% \@IEEEstripouterbraces{{{{ab}c}}}
% results in:
%
% \@IEEEstripouterbracesarg ==> a macro containing {{{ab}c}}
% \@IEEEstrippedouterbraces ==> a macro containing {ab}c
%
% the *-star form,\@IEEEstripouterbraces*, does not expand the argument
% contents during processing
\def\@IEEEstripouterbraces{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEstripouterbracesdef=\def\@@IEEEstripouterbraces}{\let\@IEEEstripouterbracesdef=\edef\@@IEEEstripouterbraces}}

\def\@@IEEEstripouterbraces#1{\@IEEEstripouterbracesdef\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg{#1}\relax
% If the macro is unchanged after being acquired as a single delimited
% argument, we know we have one sequence of tokens without any enclosing
% braces. Loop until this is true.
\loop
  \expandafter\@@@IEEEstripouterbraces\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER
\ifx\@IEEEstrippedouterbraces\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg
\else
  \let\@IEEEstripouterbracesarg\@IEEEstrippedouterbraces
\repeat}

\def\@@@IEEEstripouterbraces#1\@IEEEgeneralsequenceDELIMITER{\def\@IEEEstrippedouterbraces{#1}}



% usage: \@IEEEextractgroup*{}
% \@IEEEextractgroup fully expands its argument (which it then stores in
% \@IEEEextractgrouparg) via \edef and then assigns the first "brace group"
% of tokens to the macro \@IEEEextractedgroup.
% The remaining groups, if any, are stored in the macro
% \@IEEEextractedgroupremain. If the argument does not contain the requisite
% groups, the respective macros will be defined to be empty.
% There is an asymmetry in that \@IEEEextractedgroup is stripped of its first
% outer grouping while \@IEEEextractedgroupremain retains even the outer
% grouping (if present) that originally identified it as a group.
%
% For example:
% \@IEEEextractgroup{{{ab}}{c{de}}}
% results in:
%
% \@IEEEextractgrouparg       ==> a macro containing {{ab}}{c{de}}
% \@IEEEextractedgroup        ==> a macro containing {ab}
% \@IEEEextractedgroupremain  ==> a macro containing {c{de}}
%
% The *-star form, \@IEEEextractgroup*, does not expand its argument
% contents during processing.
\def\@IEEEextractgroup{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEextractgroupdef=\def\@@IEEEextractgroup}{\let\@IEEEextractgroupdef=\edef\@@IEEEextractgroup}}

\def\@@IEEEextractgroup#1{\@IEEEextractgroupdef\@IEEEextractgrouparg{#1}\relax
% trap the case of an empty extracted group as this would cause problems with
% \@IEEEextractgroupremain's argument acquisition
\ifx\@IEEEextractgrouparg\@empty
  \def\@IEEEextractedgroup{}\relax
  \def\@IEEEextractedgroupremain{}\relax
\else
  % We have to use some dirty tricks here. We want to insert {} around
  % whatever remains after the first group so that TeX's argument scanner
  % will preserve any originally enclosing braces as well as provide an
  % empty argument to acquire even if there isn't a second group.
  % In this first of two dirty tricks, we put a } at the end of the structure
  % we are going to extract from. The \ifnum0=`{\fi keeps TeX happy to allow
  % what would otherwise be an unbalanced macro definition for
  % \@@IEEEextractgroup to be acceptable to it.
  \ifnum0=`{\fi\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroupremain\@IEEEextractgrouparg}\relax
\fi}

% In the second part of the dirty tricks, we insert a leading { right after
% the first group is acquired, but before the remainder is. Again, the
% \ifnum0=`}\fi keeps TeX happy during definition time, but will disappear
% during run time.
\def\@IEEEextractgroupremain#1{\def\@IEEEextractedgroup{#1}\expandafter\@@IEEEextractgroupremain\expandafter{\ifnum0=`}\fi}

\def\@@IEEEextractgroupremain#1{\def\@IEEEextractedgroupremain{#1}}



% \@IEEEextracttoken relocated at top because margin setting commands rely on it



% usage: \@IEEEextracttokengroups*{}
% \@IEEEextracttokengroups fully expands its argument (which it then stores
% in \@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg) and then assigns the first "brace group" of
% tokens (with the outermost braces removed) to the macro
% \@IEEEextractedfirstgroup.
% The meaning of the first nonbrace (but including the empty group) token
% within this first group is assigned via \let to \@IEEEextractedfirsttoken
% as well as stored in the macro \@IEEEextractedfirsttokenmacro. If a first
% nonbrace token does not exist (or is an empty group), these will be \relax
% and empty, respectively.  Tokens that would otherwise be discarded during
% the acquisition of the first token in the first group are stored in
% \@IEEEextractedfirsttokensdiscarded, however their original relative brace
% nesting depths are not guaranteed to be preserved.
% The first group within this first group is stored in the macro
% \@IEEEextractedfirstfirstgroup.
% Likewise for the next group after the first: \@IEEEextractednextgroup,
% \@IEEEextractednextfirstgroup, \@IEEEextractednextgroupfirsttoken,
% \@IEEEextractednextgroupfirsttokenmacro, and 
% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttokensdiscarded.
% All tokens/groups after the first group, including any enclosing braces,
% are stored in the macro \@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain which will
% be empty if none exist.
%
% For example:
% \@IEEEextracttokengroups{{{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g}}
% will result in:
%
% \@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg             ==> a macro containing {{ab}{cd}}{{ef}g}
% \@IEEEextractedfirstgroup               ==> a macro containing {ab}{cd}
% \@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain    ==> a macro containing {{ef}g}
% \@IEEEextractedfirsttoken               ==> the letter a
% \@IEEEextractedfirsttokenmacro          ==> a macro containing a
% \@IEEEextractedfirsttokensdiscarded     ==> a macro containing bcd
% \@IEEEextractedfirstfirstgroup          ==> a macro containing ab
% \@IEEEextractednextgroup                ==> a macro containing {ef}g
% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttoken           ==> the letter e
% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttokenmacro      ==> a macro containing e
% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttokensdiscarded ==> a macro containing fg
% \@IEEEextractednextfirstgroup           ==> a macro containing ef
%
% If given an empty argument, \@IEEEextractedfirsttoken and
% \@IEEEextractednextfirsttoken will be set to \relax
% and all the macros will be empty.
% the *-star form, \@IEEEextracttokengroups*, does not expand its argument
% contents during processing.
%
% Depends on: \@IEEEextractgroup, \@IEEEextracttoken
\def\@IEEEextracttokengroups{\@ifstar{\let\@IEEEextracttokengroupsdef=\def\@@IEEEextracttokengroups}{\let\@IEEEextracttokengroupsdef=\edef\@@IEEEextracttokengroups}}
\def\@@IEEEextracttokengroups#1{\@IEEEextracttokengroupsdef\@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg{#1}\relax
% begin extraction, these functions are safe with empty arguments
% first group
\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextracttokengroupsarg}\relax
\let\@IEEEextractedfirstgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup
\let\@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain\@IEEEextractedgroupremain
\expandafter\@IEEEextracttoken\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractedfirstgroup}\relax
\let\@IEEEextractedfirsttoken\@IEEEextractedtoken
\let\@IEEEextractedfirsttokenmacro\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro
\let\@IEEEextractedfirsttokensdiscarded\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded
% first first group
\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractedfirstgroup}\relax
\let\@IEEEextractedfirstfirstgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup
% next group
\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractedafterfirstgroupremain}\relax
\let\@IEEEextractednextgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup
\expandafter\@IEEEextracttoken\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractednextgroup}\relax
\let\@IEEEextractednextfirsttoken\@IEEEextractedtoken
\let\@IEEEextractednextfirsttokenmacro\@IEEEextractedtokenmacro
\let\@IEEEextractednextfirsttokensdiscarded\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded
% next first group
\expandafter\@IEEEextractgroup\expandafter*\expandafter{\@IEEEextractednextgroup}\relax
\let\@IEEEextractednextfirstgroup\@IEEEextractedgroup}


%% -- End of Command Argument Scanning Support Functions --




%%
%% START OF IEEEeqnarray DEFINITIONS
%%
%% Inspired by the concepts, examples, and previous works of LaTeX 
%% coders and developers such as Donald Arseneau, Fred Bartlett, 
%% David Carlisle, Tony Liu, Frank Mittelbach, Piet van Oostrum, 
%% Roland Winkler and Mark Wooding.
%% I don't make the claim that my work here is even near their calibre. ;)


\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojot% flag to indicate if the environment was called as the star form
\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojotfalse

\newif\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt% tracks if the environment should advance the col counter
% allows a way to make an \IEEEeqnarraybox that can be used within an \IEEEeqnarray
% used by IEEEeqnarraymulticol so that it can work properly in both
\@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue

\newcount\@IEEEeqnnumcols % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols are defined
\newcount\@IEEEeqncolcnt  % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols the user actually used


% The default math style used by the columns
\def\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{\displaystyle}
% The default text style used by the columns
% default to using the current font
\def\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle{\relax}

% like the iedlistdecl but for \IEEEeqnarray
\def\IEEEeqnarraydecl{\relax}
\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl{\relax}



% V1.8 flags to indicate that equation numbering is to persist
\newif\if@IEEEeqnumpersist%
\@IEEEeqnumpersistfalse
\newif\if@IEEEsubeqnumpersist%
\@IEEEsubeqnumpersistfalse
%
% V1.8 flags to indicate if (sub)equation number of last line was preadvanced
\newif\if@IEEEeqnumpreadv%
\@IEEEeqnumpreadvfalse
\newif\if@IEEEsubeqnumpreadv%
\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvfalse

\newcount\@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback% saves previous value of IEEEsubequation number in case we need to restore it

% \yesnumber is the opposite of \nonumber
% a novel concept with the same def as the equationarray package
% However, we give IEEE versions too since some LaTeX packages such as 
% the MDWtools mathenv.sty redefine \nonumber to something else.
% This command is intended for use in non-IEEEeqnarray math environments
\providecommand{\yesnumber}{\global\@eqnswtrue}


% IEEEyes/nonumber 
% V1.8 add persistant * forms
% These commands can alter the type of equation an IEEEeqnarray line is.
\def\IEEEyesnumber{\@ifstar{\global\@IEEEeqnumpersisttrue\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpersistfalse\@IEEEyesnumber}{\@IEEEyesnumber}}

\def\@IEEEyesnumber{\global\@eqnswtrue
\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% alter counters and label only inside an IEEEeqnarray
\ifnum\c@IEEEsubequation>0\relax
   \stepcounter{equation}\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}\gdef\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}\relax
   \gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefequation}% setup hyperref label
\fi
% even if we reached this eqn num via a preadv, it is legit now
\global\@IEEEeqnumpreadvfalse\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvfalse
\fi}

\def\IEEEnonumber{\@ifstar{\global\@IEEEeqnumpersistfalse\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpersistfalse\global\@eqnswfalse}{\global\@eqnswfalse}}


\def\IEEEyessubnumber{\@ifstar{\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpersisttrue\@IEEEyessubnumber}{\@IEEEyessubnumber}}
%
\def\@IEEEyessubnumber{\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% alter counters and label only inside an IEEEeqnarray
  \ifnum\c@IEEEsubequation>0\relax% if it already is a subequation, we are good to go as-is
  \else% if we are a regular equation we have to watch out for two cases
    \if@IEEEeqnumpreadv% if this equation is the result of a preadvance, backout and bump the sub eqnnum
       \global\advance\c@equation\m@ne\global\c@IEEEsubequation=\@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback\addtocounter{IEEEsubequation}{1}\relax
    \else% non-preadvanced equations just need initialization of their sub eqnnum
       \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{1}\relax
    \fi
  \fi% fi already is subequation
  \gdef\@currentlabel{\p@IEEEsubequation\theIEEEsubequation}\relax
  \gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefsubequation}% setup hyperref label
  \global\@IEEEeqnumpreadvfalse\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvfalse% no longer a preadv anymore
  \global\@eqnswtrue
\fi}


\def\IEEEnosubnumber{\@ifstar{\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpersistfalse\@IEEEnosubnumber}{\@IEEEnosubnumber}}
%
\def\@IEEEnosubnumber{\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% alter counters and label only inside an IEEEeqnarray
  \if@eqnsw % we do nothing unless we know we will display because we play with the counters here
    % if it currently is a subequation, bump up to the next equation number and turn off the subequation
    \ifnum\c@IEEEsubequation>0\relax\addtocounter{equation}{1}\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}\relax
    \fi
    \global\@IEEEeqnumpreadvfalse\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvfalse% no longer a preadv anymore
    \gdef\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}\relax
    \gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefequation}% setup hyperref label
  \fi
\fi}



% allows users to "push away" equations that get too close to the equation numbers
\def\IEEEeqnarraynumspace{\hphantom{\ifnum\c@IEEEsubequation>0\relax\theIEEEsubequationdis\else\theequationdis\fi}}

% provides a way to span multiple columns within IEEEeqnarray environments
% will consider \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt before globally advancing the
% column counter - so as to work within \IEEEeqnarraybox
% usage: \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{number cols. to span}{col type}{cell text}
\long\def\IEEEeqnarraymulticol#1#2#3{\multispan{#1}\relax
% check if column is defined for the precolumn definition
% We have to be careful here because TeX scans for & even within an \iffalse
% where it does not expand macros. So, if we used only one \ifx and a #3
% appeared in the false branch and the user inserted another alignment
% structure that uses & in the \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{}, TeX will not see that
% there is an inner alignment in the false branch yet still will see any &
% there and will think that they apply to the outer alignment resulting in an
% incomplete \ifx error.
% So, here we use separate checks for the pre and post parts in order to keep
% the #3 outside of all conditionals.
\relax\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#2\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined\relax
\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#2\endcsname
\else% if not, error and use default type
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#2" in \string\IEEEeqnarraymulticol.\MessageBreak
Using a default centering column instead}%
{You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}%
\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE@IEEEdefault\endcsname
\fi
% The ten \relax are to help prevent misleading error messages in case a user
% accidently inserted a macro that tries to acquire additional arguments.
#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax
% check if column is defined for the postcolumn definition
\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#2\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined\relax
\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#2\endcsname
\else% if not, use the default type
\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST@IEEEdefault\endcsname
\fi
% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by #1\relax\fi}

% like \omit, but maintains track of the column counter for \IEEEeqnarray
\def\IEEEeqnarrayomit{\omit\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax\fi}


% provides a way to define a letter referenced column type
% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{col. type letter/name}{pre insertion text}{post insertion text}
\def\IEEEeqnarraydefcol#1#2#3{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#1\endcsname{#2}%
\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#1\endcsname{#3}%
\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname{1}}


% provides a way to define a numerically referenced inter-column glue types
% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep{col. glue number}{glue definition}
\def\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep#1#2{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\romannumeral #1\endcsname{#2}%
\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\romannumeral #1\endcsname{1}}


\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined{1}% just a macro for 1, used for checking undefined column types


% expands and appends the given argument to the \@IEEEtrantmptoksA token list
% used to build up the \halign preamble
\def\@IEEEappendtoksA#1{\edef\@@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA #1}}%
\@@IEEEappendtoksA}

% also appends to \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, but does not expand the argument
% uses \toks8 as a scratchpad register
\def\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA#1{\toks8={#1}%
\edef\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\the\toks8}}%
\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA}

% define some common column types for the user
% math
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{l}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil}
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{c}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil}
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{r}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$}
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{L}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil}
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{C}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil}
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{R}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$}
% text
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{s}{\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil}
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{t}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil}
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{u}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{}

% vertical rules
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{v}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{vv}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{V}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{VV}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}%
{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}

% horizontal rules
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{h}{}{\leaders\hrule height\arrayrulewidth\hfil}
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{H}{}{\leaders\vbox{\hrule width\arrayrulewidth\vskip\doublerulesep\hrule width\arrayrulewidth}\hfil}

% plain
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{x}{}{}
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{X}{$}{$}

% the default column type to use in the event a column type is not defined
\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{@IEEEdefault}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil}


% a zero tabskip (used for "-" col types)
\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero{0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt}
% a centering tabskip (used for "+" col types)
\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter{1000pt plus 0pt minus 1000pt}

% top level default tabskip glues for the start, end, and inter-column
% may be reset within environments not always at the top level, e.g., \IEEEeqnarraybox
\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default start glue
\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default end glue
\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue



% creates a vertical rule that extends from the bottom to the top a a cell
% Provided in case other packages redefine \vline some other way.
% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayvrule[rule thickness]
% If no argument is provided, \arrayrulewidth will be used for the rule thickness. 
\newcommand\IEEEeqnarrayvrule[1][\arrayrulewidth]{\vrule\@width#1\relax}

% creates a blank separator row
% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[separation length][font size commands]
% default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax]
% blank arguments inherit the default values
% uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers
\def\IEEEeqnarrayseprow{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}}
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][\relax]}}
\def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}%
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty%
% get the skip value, based on the font commands
% use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3
% assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes
{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}%
\else%
{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}%
\fi%
\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax}

% creates a blank separator row, but omits all the column templates
% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[separation length][font size commands]
% default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax]
% blank arguments inherit the default values
% uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers
\def\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}}
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][\relax]}}
\def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}%
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty%
% get the skip value, based on the font commands
% use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3
% assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes
{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}%
\else%
{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}%
\fi%
\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax}



% draws a single rule across all the columns optional
% argument determines the rule width, \arrayrulewidth is the default
% updates column counter as needed and turns off struts
% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[rule line thickness]
\def\IEEEeqnarrayrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}}
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]{\leaders\hrule height#1\hfil\relax% put in our rule 
% turn off any struts
\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]\relax}


% draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator row, and then
% another single rule row 
% first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default
% second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default
% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing]
\def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}}
\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]}%
{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][\doublerulesep]}}
\def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
% we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][]
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
\else%
\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]\relax%
\fi%
\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}%
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[\doublerulesep][\relax]%
\else%
\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#2][\relax]%
\fi%
\\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}%
% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
\else%
\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]%
\fi%
}

% draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator (cutting) row, and then
% another single rule row 
% first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default
% second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default
% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing]
\def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[\arrayrulewidth]}}
\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]}%
{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][\doublerulesep]}}
\def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
% we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][]
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
\else%
\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]%
\fi%
\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}%
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[\doublerulesep][\relax]%
\else%
\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#2][\relax]%
\fi%
\\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}%
% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
\else%
\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]%
\fi%
}



% inserts a full row's worth of &'s
% relies on \@IEEEeqnnumcols to provide the correct number of columns
% uses \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, \count0 as scratch registers
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}\count0=1\relax%
\loop% add cols if the user did not use them all
\ifnum\count0<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax%
\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}%
\advance\count0 by 1\relax% update the col count
\repeat%
\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA%execute the &'s
}



\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner % flag to indicate if we are within the lines
\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse    % of an IEEEeqnarray - after the IEEEeqnarraydecl

\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{0pt} % height and depth of IEEEeqnarray struts
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{0pt}

\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{0pt} % default height and depth of
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{0pt}  % struts within an IEEEeqnarray

\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{0pt} % saved master strut height
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{0pt} % and depth

\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut % flag to indicate that the master strut value
\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue     % is to be used



% saves the strut height and depth of the master strut
\def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave{\relax%
\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
% remove stretchability
\dimen0\skip0\relax%
\dimen2\skip2\relax%
% save values
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{\the\dimen0}%
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{\the\dimen2}}

% restores the strut height and depth of the master strut
\def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore{\relax%
\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE\relax%
\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE\relax%
% remove stretchability
\dimen0\skip0\relax%
\dimen2\skip2\relax%
% restore values
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}}


% globally restores the strut height and depth to the 
% master values and sets the master strut flag to true
\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset{\relax%
\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
% remove stretchability
\dimen0\skip0\relax%
\dimen2\skip2\relax%
% restore values
\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
\global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue}


% if the master strut is not to be used, make the current
% values of \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight, \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth
% and the use master strut flag, global
% this allows user strut commands issued in the last column to be carried
% into the isolation/strut column
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus{\relax%
\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut\else%
\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight}%
\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth}%
\global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse%
\fi}



% usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{height}{depth}[font size commands]
% If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, sets the height
% and depth of both the master and local struts. If called inside
% an IEEEeqnarray line, sets the height and depth of the local strut
% only and sets the flag to indicate the use of the local strut
% values. If the height or depth is left blank, 0.7\normalbaselineskip
% and 0.3\normalbaselineskip will be used, respectively.
% The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under
% a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current
% font is used.
% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2
\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}[\relax]}}
\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#1}%
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty%
{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.7\normalbaselineskip}}%
\skip0=\skip3\relax%
\else% arg one present
{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1\relax}}%
\skip0=\skip3\relax%
\fi% if null arg
\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#2}%
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty%
{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.3\normalbaselineskip}}%
\skip2=\skip3\relax%
\else% arg two present
{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2\relax}}%
\skip2=\skip3\relax%
\fi% if null arg
% remove stretchability, just to be safe
\dimen0\skip0\relax%
\dimen2\skip2\relax%
% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth
\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master
\else% outer, have to set master strut too
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut
\fi}


% usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{added height}{added depth}[font size commands]
% If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, adds the given height
% and depth to both the master and local struts.
% If called inside an IEEEeqnarray line, adds the given height and depth
% to the local strut only and sets the flag to indicate the use 
% of the local strut values.
% In both cases, if a height or depth is left blank, 0pt is used instead.
% The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under
% a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current
% font is used.
% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2
\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}[\relax]}}
\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#1}%
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty%
\skip0=0pt\relax%
\else% arg one present
{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1}}%
\skip0=\skip3\relax%
\fi% if null arg
\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#2}%
\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty%
\skip2=0pt\relax%
\else% arg two present
{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2}}%
\skip2=\skip3\relax%
\fi% if null arg
% remove stretchability, just to be safe
\dimen0\skip0\relax%
\dimen2\skip2\relax%
% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth
\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size
% get local strut size
\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax%
\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax%
% add it to the user supplied values
\advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax%
\advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax%
% update the local strut size
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master
\else% outer, have to set master strut too
% get master strut size
\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
% add it to the user supplied values
\advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax%
\advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax%
% update the local and master strut sizes
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut
\fi}


% allow user a way to see the struts
\newif\ifIEEEvisiblestruts
\IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse

% inserts an invisible strut using the master or local strut values
% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \dimen0, \dimen2
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut{\relax%
\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut
% get master strut size
\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
\else%
% get local strut size
\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax%
\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax%
\fi%
% remove stretchability, probably not needed
\dimen0\skip0\relax%
\dimen2\skip2\relax%
% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth
% allow user to see struts if desired
\ifIEEEvisiblestruts%
\vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax%
\else%
\vrule width0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi}


% creates an invisible strut, useable even outside \IEEEeqnarray
% if \IEEEvisiblestrutstrue, the strut will be visible and 0.2pt wide. 
% usage: \IEEEstrut[height][depth][font size commands]
% default is \IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip][0.3\normalbaselineskip][\relax]
% blank arguments inherit the default values
% uses \dimen0, \dimen2, \skip0, \skip2
\def\IEEEstrut{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEstrut}{\@IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip]}}
\def\@IEEEstrut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEstrut[#1]}{\@@IEEEstrut[#1][0.3\normalbaselineskip]}}
\def\@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]}{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][\relax]}}
\def\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][#3]{\mbox{#3\relax%
\def\@IEEEstrutARG{#1}%
\ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty%
\skip0=0.7\normalbaselineskip\relax%
\else%
\skip0=#1\relax%
\fi%
\def\@IEEEstrutARG{#2}%
\ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty%
\skip2=0.3\normalbaselineskip\relax%
\else%
\skip2=#2\relax%
\fi%
% remove stretchability, probably not needed
\dimen0\skip0\relax%
\dimen2\skip2\relax%
\ifIEEEvisiblestruts%
\vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax%
\else%
\vrule width0.0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi}}


% enables strut mode by setting a default strut size and then zeroing the
% \baselineskip, \lineskip, \lineskiplimit and \jot
\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutmode{\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0.7\normalbaselineskip}{0.3\normalbaselineskip}[\relax]%
\baselineskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt\lineskiplimit=0pt\jot=0pt}


% equation and subequation forms to use to setup hyperref's \@currentHref
\def\@IEEEtheHrefequation{equation.\theHequation}
\def\@IEEEtheHrefsubequation{equation.\theHequation\alph{IEEEsubequation}}


\def\IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnumpersisttrue\@IEEEsubeqnumpersistfalse\@IEEEeqnarray}
\def\endIEEEeqnarray{\end@IEEEeqnarray}

\@namedef{IEEEeqnarray*}{\@IEEEeqnumpersistfalse\@IEEEsubeqnumpersistfalse\@IEEEeqnarray}
\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarray*}{\end@IEEEeqnarray}


% \IEEEeqnarray is an enhanced \eqnarray. 
% The star form defaults to not putting equation numbers at the end of each row.
% usage: \IEEEeqnarray[decl]{cols}
\def\@IEEEeqnarray{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarray}{\@@IEEEeqnarray[\relax]}}
% We have to be careful here to normalize catcodes just before acquiring the
% cols as that specification may contain punctuation which could be subject
% to document catcode changes.
\def\@@IEEEeqnarray[#1]{\begingroup\IEEEnormalcatcodes\@@@IEEEeqnarray[#1]}
\def\@@@IEEEeqnarray[#1]#2{\endgroup
   % default to showing the equation number or not based on whether or not
   % the star form was involked
   \if@IEEEeqnumpersist\global\@eqnswtrue
   \else% not the star form
   \global\@eqnswfalse
   \fi% if star form
   % provide a basic hyperref \theHequation if this has not already been setup (hyperref not loaded, or no section counter)
   \@ifundefined{theHequation}{\def\theHequation{\arabic{equation}}}{}\relax
   % provide dummy hyperref commands in case hyperref is not loaded
   \providecommand{\Hy@raisedlink}[1]{}\relax
   \providecommand{\hyper@anchorstart}[1]{}\relax
   \providecommand{\hyper@anchorend}{}\relax
   \providecommand{\@currentHref}{}\relax
   \@IEEEeqnumpreadvfalse% reset eqnpreadv flag
   \@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvfalse% reset subeqnpreadv flag
   \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse% not yet within the lines of the halign
   \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default
   \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise
   \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off
   % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it
   \lineskip=0pt\relax
   \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax
   \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax%
   \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax%
   \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math
   \@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue% advance the col counter for each col the user uses, 
                             % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build
   %V1.8 Here we preadvance to the next equation number.
   % If the user later wants a continued subequation, we can roll back.
   \global\@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback=\c@IEEEsubequation%
   \stepcounter{equation}\@IEEEeqnumpreadvtrue% advance equation counter before first line
   \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}% no subequation yet
   \let\@IEEEcurrentlabelsave\@currentlabel% save current label as we later change it globally
   \let\@IEEEcurrentHrefsave\@currentHref% save current href label as we later change it globally
   \def\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}% redefine the ref label
   \def\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefequation}% setup hyperref label
   \IEEEeqnarraydecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides
   #1\relax% allow user to override defaults
   \let\\\@IEEEeqnarraycr% replace newline with one that can put in eqn. numbers
   \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@% col. count = 0 for first line
   \@IEEEbuildpreamble{#2}\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA 
   % put in the column for the equation number
   \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first
   \toks0={##}%
   % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the isolation col, this helps with error checking
   \@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}%
   % add the isolation column
   \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}%
   % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the equation number col, this helps with error checking
   \@IEEEappendtoksA{&\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}%
   % add the equation number col to the preamble
   \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\hb@xt@\z@\bgroup\hss\the\toks0\egroup}%
   % note \@IEEEeqnnumcols does not count the equation col or isolation col
   % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build
   \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax
   % begin the display alignment
   \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines
   $$\everycr{}\halign to\displaywidth\bgroup
   % "exspand" the preamble
   \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr}

% enter isolation/strut column (or the next column if the user did not use
% every column), record the strut status, complete the columns, do the strut if needed,
% restore counters (to backout any equation setup for a next line that was never used)
% to their correct values and exit
\def\end@IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&\@@IEEEeqnarraycr\egroup
\if@IEEEsubeqnumpreadv\global\advance\c@IEEEsubequation\m@ne\fi
\if@IEEEeqnumpreadv\global\advance\c@equation\m@ne\global\c@IEEEsubequation=\@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback\fi
\global\let\@currentlabel\@IEEEcurrentlabelsave% restore current label
\global\let\@currentHref\@IEEEcurrentHrefsave% restore current href label
$$\@ignoretrue}


% IEEEeqnarray uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to
% end rows. This allows for things like \\*[vskip amount]
% These "cr" macros are modified versions of those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray
% the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid
% altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the next column
% as there is an isolation/strut column after the user's columns
\def\@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&% save strut status and advance to next column
   {\ifnum0=`}\fi
   \@ifstar{%
      \global\@eqpen\@M\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR
   }{%
      \global\@eqpen\interdisplaylinepenalty \@IEEEeqnarrayYCR
   }%
}

\def\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR\z@skip}

\def\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR[#1]{%
   \ifnum0=`{\fi}%
   \@@IEEEeqnarraycr
   \noalign{\penalty\@eqpen\vskip\jot\vskip #1\relax}}%

\def\@@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register
    \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by -1\relax% adjust col count because of the isolation column
    \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt>\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax
    \@IEEEclspkgerror{Too many columns within the IEEEeqnarray\MessageBreak
                          environment}%
    {Use fewer \string &'s or put more columns in the IEEEeqnarray column\MessageBreak 
     specifications.}\relax%
    \else
    \loop% add cols if the user did not use them all
    \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax
    \@IEEEappendtoksA{&}%
    \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax% update the col count
    \repeat
    % this number of &'s will take us the the isolation column
    \fi
    % execute the &'s
    \the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA%
    % handle the strut/isolation column
    \@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do the strut if needed
    \@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray
    &% and enter the equation number column
    \if@eqnsw% only if we display something
      \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorstart{\@currentHref}}% start a hyperref anchor
      \global\@IEEEeqnumpreadvfalse\relax% displaying an equation number means
      \global\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvfalse\relax% the equation counters point to valid equations
      % V1.8 Here we setup the counters, currentlabel and status for what would be the *next*
      % equation line as would be the case under the current settings. However, there are two problems.
      % One problem is that there might not ever be a next line. The second problem is that the user
      % may later alter the meaning of a line with commands such as \IEEEyessubnumber. So, to handle
      % these cases we have to record the current values of the (sub)equation counters and revert back
      % to them if the next line is changed or never comes. The \if@IEEEeqnumpreadv, \if@IEEEsubeqnumpreadv
      % and \@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback stuff tracks this.
      % The logic to handle all this is surprisingly complex, but a nice feature of the approach here is
      % that the equation counters and labels remain valid for what the line would be unless a
      % \IEEEyessubnumber et al. later changes it. So, any hyperref links are always correct.
      \ifnum\c@IEEEsubequation>0\relax% handle subequation
         \theIEEEsubequationdis\relax
         \if@IEEEsubeqnumpersist% setup for default type of next line
            \stepcounter{IEEEsubequation}\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvtrue\relax
            \gdef\@currentlabel{\p@IEEEsubequation\theIEEEsubequation}\relax
            \gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefsubequation}% setup hyperref label
         \else
             % if no subeqnum persist, go ahead and setup for a new equation number
             \global\@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback=\c@IEEEsubequation
             \stepcounter{equation}\global\@IEEEeqnumpreadvtrue\relax
             \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}\gdef\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}\relax
             \gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefequation}% setup hyperref label
         \fi
      \else% display a standard equation number
        \theequationdis\relax
        \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}\relax% not really needed
        \if@IEEEsubeqnumpersist% setup for default type of next line
           % subequations that follow plain equations carry the same equation number e.g, 5, 5a rather than 5, 6a
           \stepcounter{IEEEsubequation}\global\@IEEEsubeqnumpreadvtrue\relax
           \gdef\@currentlabel{\p@IEEEsubequation\theIEEEsubequation}\relax
           \gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefsubequation}% setup hyperref label
         \else
             % if no subeqnum persist, go ahead and setup for a new equation number
             \global\@IEEEsubeqnnumrollback=\c@IEEEsubequation
             \stepcounter{equation}\global\@IEEEeqnumpreadvtrue\relax
             \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}\gdef\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}\relax
             \gdef\@currentHref{\@IEEEtheHrefequation}% setup hyperref label
         \fi
      \fi%
      \Hy@raisedlink{\hyper@anchorend}% end hyperref anchor
    \fi% fi only if we display something
    % reset the flags to indicate the default preferences of the display of equation numbers
    \if@IEEEeqnumpersist\global\@eqnswtrue\else\global\@eqnswfalse\fi
    \if@IEEEsubeqnumpersist\global\@eqnswtrue\fi% ditto for the subequation flag
    % reset the number of columns the user actually used
    \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@\relax
    % the real end of the line
    \cr}





% \IEEEeqnarraybox is like \IEEEeqnarray except the box form puts everything
% inside a vtop, vbox, or vcenter box depending on the letter in the second
% optional argument (t,b,c). Vbox is the default. Unlike \IEEEeqnarray,
% equation numbers are not displayed and \IEEEeqnarraybox can be nested.
% \IEEEeqnarrayboxm is for math mode (like \array) and does not put the vbox
% within an hbox.
% \IEEEeqnarrayboxt is for text mode (like \tabular) and puts the vbox within
% a \hbox{$ $} construct.
% \IEEEeqnarraybox will auto detect whether to use \IEEEeqnarrayboxm or 
% \IEEEeqnarrayboxt depending on the math mode.
% The third optional argument specifies the width this box is to be set to -
% natural width is the default.
% The * forms do not add \jot line spacing
% usage: \IEEEeqnarraybox[decl][pos][width]{cols}
\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxm{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojotfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
\def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxm{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
\@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojottrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}

\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxt{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojotfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
\def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxt{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
\@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojottrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}

\def\IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojotfalse\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi%
\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
\def\endIEEEeqnarraybox{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}

\@namedef{IEEEeqnarraybox*}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojottrue\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi%
\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarraybox*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}

% flag to indicate if the \IEEEeqnarraybox needs to put things into an hbox{$ $} 
% for \vcenter in non-math mode
\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW%
\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse

\def\@IEEEeqnarraybox{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox}{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[\relax]}}
% We have to be careful here to normalize catcodes just before acquiring the
% cols as that specification may contain punctuation which could be subject
% to document catcode changes.
\def\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]{\relax\begingroup\IEEEnormalcatcodes\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]}{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][b]}}
\def\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]}{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][\relax]}}

% #1 = decl; #2 = t,b,c; #3 = width, #4 = col specs
\def\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][#3]#4{\endgroup\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % not yet within the lines of the halign
   \@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave% save current master strut values
   \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default
   \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise
   \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off
   % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it
   \lineskip=0pt\relax%
   \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax%
   \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax%
   \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax%
   \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math
   % the default end glues are zero for an \IEEEeqnarraybox
   \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default start glue
   \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default end glue
   \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue
   \@advanceIEEEeqncolcntfalse% do not advance the col counter for each col the user uses, 
                              % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build
   \IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides
   #1\relax% allow user to override defaults
   \let\\\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr% replace newline with one that allows optional spacing
   \@IEEEbuildpreamble{#4}\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA
   % add an isolation column to the preamble to stop \\'s {} from getting into the last col
   \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first
   \toks0={##}%
   % add the isolation column to the preamble
   \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}% 
   % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build
   \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax
   % begin the alignment
   \everycr{}%
   % use only the very first token to determine the positioning
   \@IEEEextracttoken{#2}\relax
   \ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
     \typeout{** WARNING: IEEEeqnarraybox position specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
   \fi
   % \@IEEEextractedtoken has the first token, the rest are ignored
   % if we need to put things into and hbox and go into math mode, do so now
   \if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW \leavevmode \hbox \bgroup $\fi%
   % use the appropriate vbox type
   \if\@IEEEextractedtoken t\relax\vtop\else\if\@IEEEextractedtoken c\relax%
   \vcenter\else\vbox\fi\fi\bgroup%
   \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines
   \ifx#3\relax\halign\else\halign to #3\relax\fi%
   \bgroup
   % "exspand" the preamble
   \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr}

% carry strut status and enter the isolation/strut column, 
% exit from math mode if needed, and exit
\def\end@IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status
&% enter isolation/strut column
\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed
\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore% restore the previous master strut values
% reset the strut system for next IEEEeqnarray
% (sets local strut values back to previous master strut values)
\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset%
% ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox
\crcr\egroup\egroup%
% exit from math mode and close hbox if needed
\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW $\egroup\fi}



% IEEEeqnarraybox uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to
% end rows. This allows for things like \\[vskip amount]
% This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray
% For IEEEeqnarraybox, \\* is the same as \\
% the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid
% altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the isolation/strut column
% carry strut status into isolation/strut column
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status
&% enter isolation/strut column
\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed
% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray
\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset%
{\ifnum0=`}\fi%
\@ifstar{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}}

% test and setup the optional argument to \\[]
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR\z@skip}

% IEEEeqnarraybox does not automatically increase line spacing by \jot
\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}%
\cr\noalign{\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxnojot\else\vskip\jot\fi\vskip#1\relax}}



% usage: \@IEEEbuildpreamble{column specifiers}
% starts the halign preamble build 
% the assembled preamble is put in \@IEEEtrantmptoksA
\def\@IEEEbuildpreamble#1{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register
\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=u%current column type is not yet known
\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=s%the previous column type was the start
\let\@IEEEBPnexttype=u%next column type is not yet known
% ensure these are valid
\def\@IEEEBPcurglue={0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt}%
\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}% name of current column definition
% currently acquired numerically referenced glue
% use a name that is easier to remember
\let\@IEEEBPcurnum=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
\@IEEEBPcurnum=0%
% tracks number of columns in the preamble
\@IEEEeqnnumcols=0%
% record the default end glues
\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart}%
\edef\@IEEEBPendglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend}%
\edef\@IEEEedefMACRO{#1}\relax% fully expand the preamble to support macro containers
% now parse the user's column specifications
% \ignorespaces is used as a delimiter, need at least one trailing \relax because
% \@@IEEEbuildpreamble looks into the future 
\expandafter\@@IEEEbuildpreamble\@IEEEedefMACRO\ignorespaces\relax\relax}


% usage: \@@IEEEbuildpreamble{current column}{next column}
% parses and builds the halign preamble
\def\@@IEEEbuildpreamble#1#2{\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEbuildpreamble%
% use only the very first token to check the end
\@IEEEextracttokengroups{#1}\relax
\ifx\@IEEEextractedfirsttoken\ignorespaces\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEfinishpreamble\else%
% identify current and next token type
\@IEEEgetcoltype{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurtype}{1}% current, error on invalid
\@IEEEgetcoltype{#2}{\@IEEEBPnexttype}{0}% next, no error on invalid next
% if curtype is a glue, get the glue def
\if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEgetcurglue{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurglue}\fi%
% if curtype is a column, get the column def and set the current column name
\if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEgetcurcol{#1}\fi%
% if curtype is a numeral, acquire the user defined glue
\if\@IEEEBPcurtype n\@IEEEprocessNcol{#1}\fi%
% process the acquired glue 
\if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEprocessGcol\fi%
% process the acquired col 
\if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEprocessCcol\fi%
% ready prevtype for next col spec.
\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPcurtype%
% be sure and put back the future token(s) as a group
\fi\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble{#2}}


% usage: \@@IEEEfinishpreamble{discarded}
% executed just after preamble build is completed
% warn about zero cols, and if prevtype type = u, put in end tabskip glue
% argument is not used
\def\@@IEEEfinishpreamble#1{\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols<1\relax
\@IEEEclspkgerror{No column specifiers declared for IEEEeqnarray}%
{At least one column type must be declared for each IEEEeqnarray.}%
\fi%num cols less than 1
%if last type undefined, set default end tabskip glue
\if\@IEEEBPprevtype u\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue}\fi}


% usage: \@IEEEgetcoltype{col specifier}{\output}{error more}
% Identify and return the column specifier's type code in the given
% \output macro:
% n = number
% g = glue (any other char in catagory 12)
% c = letter
% e = \ignorespaces (end of sequence)
% u = undefined
% error mode: 0 = no error message, 1 = error on invalid char
\def\@IEEEgetcoltype#1#2#3{%
% use only the very first token to determine the type
\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax
% \@IEEEextractedtoken has the first token, the rest are discarded
\let#2=u\relax% assume invalid until know otherwise
\ifx\@IEEEextractedtoken\ignorespaces\let#2=e\else
\ifcat\@IEEEextractedtoken\relax\else% screen out control sequences
\if0\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
\if1\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
\if2\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
\if3\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
\if4\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
\if5\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
\if6\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
\if7\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
\if8\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
\if9\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=n\else
\ifcat,\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=g\relax
\else\ifcat a\@IEEEextractedtoken\let#2=c\relax\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
\if#2u\relax
\if0\noexpand#3\relax\else\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid character in column specifications}%
{Only letters, numerals and certain other symbols are allowed \MessageBreak
as IEEEeqnarray column specifiers.}\fi\fi}


% usage: \@IEEEgetcurcol{col specifier}
% verify the letter referenced column exists
% and return its name in \@IEEEBPcurcolname
% if column specifier is invalid, use the default column @IEEEdefault
\def\@IEEEgetcurcol#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined%
\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{#1}\else% invalid column name
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#1" in column specifications.\MessageBreak
Using a default centering column instead}%
{You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}%
\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}\fi}


% usage: \@IEEEgetcurglue{glue specifier}{\output}
% identify the predefined (punctuation) glue value
% and return it in the given output macro
\def\@IEEEgetcurglue#1#2{%
% ! = \! (neg small)  -0.16667em (-3/18 em)
% , = \, (small)       0.16667em ( 3/18 em)
% : = \: (med)         0.22222em ( 4/18 em)
% ; = \; (large)       0.27778em ( 5/18 em)
% ' = \quad            1em
% " = \qquad           2em
% . = 0.5\arraycolsep
% / = \arraycolsep
% ? = 2\arraycolsep
% * = 1fil
% + = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter
% - = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero
% Note that all em values are referenced to the math font (textfont2) fontdimen6
% value for 1em.
% 
% use only the very first token to determine the type
\@IEEEextracttoken{#1}\relax
\ifx\@IEEEextractedtokensdiscarded\@empty\else
  \typeout{** WARNING: IEEEeqnarray predefined inter-column glue type specifiers after the first in `\@IEEEextracttokenarg' ignored (line \the\inputlineno).}\relax
\fi
% get the math font 1em value
% LaTeX2e's NFSS2 does not preload the fonts, but \IEEEeqnarray needs
% to gain access to the math (\textfont2) font's spacing parameters.
% So we create a bogus box here that uses the math font to ensure
% that \textfont2 is loaded and ready. If this is not done,
% the \textfont2 stuff here may not work.
% Thanks to Bernd Raichle for his 1997 post on this topic.
{\setbox0=\hbox{$\displaystyle\relax$}}%
% fontdimen6 has the width of 1em (a quad).
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\fontdimen6\textfont2\relax%
% identify the glue value based on the first token
% we discard anything after the first
\if!\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=-0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
\if,\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
\if:\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.22222\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
\if;\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.27778\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
\if'\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
\if"\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
\if.\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.5\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
\if/\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{\the\arraycolsep}\else
\if?\@IEEEextractedtoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
\if *\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{0pt plus 1fil minus 0pt}\else
\if+\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}\else
\if-\@IEEEextractedtoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}\else
\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}%
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid predefined inter-column glue type "#1" in\MessageBreak
column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak
0pt instead}%
{Only !,:;'"./?*+ and - are valid predefined glue types in the\MessageBreak 
IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}


% usage: \@IEEEprocessNcol{digit}
% process a numerical digit from the column specification
% and look up the corresponding user defined glue value
% can transform current type from n to g or a as the user defined glue is acquired
\def\@IEEEprocessNcol#1{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g%
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak
specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak
after the first}%
{You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak 
in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}%
\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue, future digits will be discarded
\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax%
\else% if we previously aborted a glue
\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain digit abortion
\else%acquire this number
% save the previous type before the numerical digits started
\if\@IEEEBPprevtype n\else\let\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype=\@IEEEBPprevtype\fi%
\multiply\@IEEEBPcurnum by 10\relax%
\advance\@IEEEBPcurnum by #1\relax% add in number, \relax is needed to stop TeX's number scan
\if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else%close acquisition
\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined%
\edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname}%
\else%user glue not defined
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid user defined inter-column glue type "\number\@IEEEBPcurnum" in\MessageBreak
column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak
0pt instead}%
{You must define all IEEEeqnarray numerical inter-column glue types via\MessageBreak
\string\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep \space before they are used in column specifications.}%
\edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}%
\fi% glue defined or not
\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=g% change the type to reflect the acquired glue
\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype% restore the prev type before this number glue
\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax%ready for next acquisition
\fi%close acquisition, get glue
\fi%discard or acquire number
\fi%prevtype glue or not
}


% process an acquired glue
% add any acquired column/glue pair to the preamble
\def\@IEEEprocessGcol{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain previous glue abortions
\else
% if this is the start glue, save it, but do nothing else 
% as this is not used in the preamble, but before
\if\@IEEEBPprevtype s\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEBPcurglue}%
\else%not the start glue
\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g%ignore if back to back glues
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak
specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak
after the first}%
{You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak 
in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}%
\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue
\else% not a back to back glue
\if\@IEEEBPprevtype c\relax% if the previoustype was a col, add column/glue pair to preamble
\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi
\toks0={##}%
% make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi
% insert the column defintion into the preamble, being careful not to expand
% the column definition
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPcurglue}%
\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}%
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}%
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}%
\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}%
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}%
\advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble
\else% error: non-start glue with no pending column
\@IEEEclspkgerror{Inter-column glue specifier without a prior column\MessageBreak
type in the column specifications. Ignoring this glue\MessageBreak 
specifier}%
{Except for the first and last positions, glue can be placed only\MessageBreak
between column types.}%
\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue
\fi% previous was a column
\fi% back-to-back glues
\fi% is start column glue
\fi% prev type not a
}


% process an acquired letter referenced column and, if necessary, add it to the preamble
\def\@IEEEprocessCcol{\if\@IEEEBPnexttype g\else
\if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else
% we have a column followed by something other than a glue (or numeral glue)
% so we must add this column to the preamble now
\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi%col separator for those after the first
\if\@IEEEBPnexttype e\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue\relax}\else%put in end glue
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid\relax}\fi% or default mid glue
\toks0={##}%
% make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this
\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi
% insert the column definition into the preamble, being careful not to expand
% the column definition
\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}%
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}%
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}%
\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}%
\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}%
\advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble
\fi%next type not numeral
\fi%next type not glue
}


%%
%% END OF IEEEeqnarray DEFINITIONS
%%





% set up the running headers and footers
%
% header and footer font and size specifications
\def\@IEEEheaderstyle{\normalfont\scriptsize}
\def\@IEEEfooterstyle{\normalfont\scriptsize}
%
% compsoc uses sans-serif headers and footers
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  \def\@IEEEheaderstyle{\normalfont\sffamily\scriptsize}
  \def\@IEEEfooterstyle{\normalfont\sffamily\scriptsize}
\fi


% standard page style, ps@headings
\def\ps@headings{% default to standard twoside headers, no footers
% will change later if the mode requires otherwise
\def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\@IEEEheaderstyle\rightmark\hfil\thepage}\relax
\def\@evenhead{\@IEEEheaderstyle\thepage\hfil\leftmark\hbox{}}\relax
\let\@oddfoot\@empty
\let\@evenfoot\@empty
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
  % technote twoside
  \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\@IEEEheaderstyle\leftmark\hfil\thepage}\relax
  \def\@evenhead{\@IEEEheaderstyle\thepage\hfil\leftmark\hbox{}}\relax
\fi
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
  % draft footers
  \def\@oddfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle\@date\hfil DRAFT}\relax
  \def\@evenfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle DRAFT\hfil\@date}\relax
\fi
% oneside
\if@twoside\else
  % standard one side headers
  \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\@IEEEheaderstyle\leftmark\hfil\thepage}\relax
  \let\@evenhead\@empty
  \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
    % oneside draft footers
    \def\@oddfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle\@date\hfil DRAFT}\relax
    \let\@evenfoot\@empty
  \fi
\fi
% turn off headers for conferences
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
  \let\@oddhead\@empty
  \let\@evenhead\@empty
\fi
% turn off footers for draftclsnofoot
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot
  \let\@oddfoot\@empty
  \let\@evenfoot\@empty
\fi}


% title page style, ps@IEEEtitlepagestyle
\def\ps@IEEEtitlepagestyle{% default title page headers, no footers
\def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\@IEEEheaderstyle\leftmark\hfil\thepage}\relax
\def\@evenhead{\@IEEEheaderstyle\thepage\hfil\leftmark\hbox{}}\relax
\let\@oddfoot\@empty
\let\@evenfoot\@empty
% will change later if the mode requires otherwise
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
  % draft footers
  \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else
    % but only if not draftclsnofoot
    \def\@oddfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle\@date\hfil DRAFT}\relax
    \def\@evenfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle DRAFT\hfil\@date}\relax
  \fi
\else
  % all nondraft mode footers
  \if@IEEEusingpubid
    % for title pages that are using a pubid
    % do not repeat pubid on the title page if using a peer review cover page
    \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else
      % for noncompsoc papers, the pubid uses footnotesize and
      % is at the same vertical position as where the last baseline would normally be
      \def\@oddfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\footnotesize\raisebox{\footskip}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax
      \def\@evenfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\footnotesize\raisebox{\footskip}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax
      \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
        % for compsoc papers, the pubid is at the same vertical position as the normal footer
        \def\@oddfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax
        \def\@evenfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax
      \fi
    \fi
  \fi
\fi
% turn off headers for conferences
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
  \let\@oddhead\@empty
  \let\@evenhead\@empty
\fi}


% peer review cover page style, ps@IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle
\def\ps@IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle{% default peer review cover no headers, no footers
\let\@oddhead\@empty
\let\@evenhead\@empty
\let\@oddfoot\@empty
\let\@evenfoot\@empty
% will change later if the mode requires otherwise
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
  % draft footers
  \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else
    % but only if not draftclsnofoot
    \def\@oddfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle\@date\hfil DRAFT}\relax
    \def\@evenfoot{\@IEEEfooterstyle DRAFT\hfil\@date}\relax
  \fi
\else
  % all nondraft mode footers
  \if@IEEEusingpubid
    % for peer review cover pages that are using a pubid
    % for noncompsoc papers, the pubid uses footnotesize and
    % is at the same vertical position as where the last baseline would normally be
    \def\@oddfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\footnotesize\raisebox{\footskip}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax
    \def\@evenfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\footnotesize\raisebox{\footskip}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax
    \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
      % for compsoc papers, the pubid is at the same vertical position as the normal footer
      \def\@oddfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax
      \def\@evenfoot{\hbox{}\hss\@IEEEfooterstyle\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss\hbox{}}\relax
    \fi
  \fi
\fi}



%% Defines the command for putting the header.
%% Note that all the text is forced into uppercase, if you have some text
%% that needs to be in lower case, for instance et. al., then either manually
%% set \leftmark and \rightmark or use \MakeLowercase{et. al.} within the
%% arguments to \markboth.
%% V1.7b add \protect to work with Babel
\def\markboth#1#2{\def\leftmark{\MakeUppercase{\protect#1}}%
\def\rightmark{\MakeUppercase{\protect#2}}}

\def\today{\ifcase\month\or
    January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
    July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
    \space\number\day, \number\year}




%% CITATION AND BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMANDS
%% 
%% V1.6 no longer supports the older, nonstandard \shortcite and \citename setup stuff
% 
% 
% Modify Latex2e \@citex to separate citations with "], ["
\def\@citex[#1]#2{%
  \let\@citea\@empty
  \@cite{\@for\@citeb:=#2\do
    {\@citea\def\@citea{], [}%
     \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb\@empty}%
     \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi
     \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb}{\mbox{\reset@font\bfseries ?}%
       \G@refundefinedtrue
       \@latex@warning
         {Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage \space undefined}}%
       {\hbox{\csname b@\@citeb\endcsname}}}}{#1}}

% V1.6 we create hooks for the optional use of Donald Arseneau's
% cite.sty package. cite.sty is "smart" and will notice that the
% following format controls are already defined and will not
% redefine them. The result will be the proper sorting of the
% citation numbers and auto detection of 3 or more entry "ranges" -
% all in IEEE style:  [1], [2], [5]--[7], [12]
% This also allows for an optional note, i.e., \cite[mynote]{..}.
% If the \cite with note has more than one reference, the note will
% be applied to the last of the listed references. It is generally
% desired that if a note is given, only one reference is listed in
% that \cite.
% Thanks to Mr. Arseneau for providing the required format arguments
% to produce the IEEE style.
\def\citepunct{], [}
\def\citedash{]--[}

% V1.7 default to using same font for urls made by url.sty
\AtBeginDocument{\csname url@samestyle\endcsname}

% V1.6 class files should always provide these
\def\newblock{\hskip .11em\@plus.33em\@minus.07em}
\let\@openbib@code\@empty
% V1.8b article.cls is now providing these too
% we do not use \@mkboth, nor alter the page style
\newenvironment{theindex}
               {\if@twocolumn
                  \@restonecolfalse
                \else
                  \@restonecoltrue
                \fi
                \twocolumn[\section*{\indexname}]%
                \parindent\z@
                \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
                \columnseprule \z@
                \columnsep 35\p@
                \let\item\@idxitem}
               {\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi}
\newcommand\@idxitem{\par\hangindent 40\p@}
\newcommand\subitem{\@idxitem \hspace*{20\p@}}
\newcommand\subsubitem{\@idxitem \hspace*{30\p@}}
\newcommand\indexspace{\par \vskip 10\p@ \@plus5\p@ \@minus3\p@\relax}



% Provide support for the control entries of IEEEtran.bst V1.00 and later.
% V1.7 optional argument allows for a different aux file to be specified in
% order to handle multiple bibliographies. For example, with multibib.sty:
% \newcites{sec}{Secondary Literature}
% \bstctlcite[@auxoutsec]{BSTcontrolhak}
\def\bstctlcite{\@ifnextchar[{\@bstctlcite}{\@bstctlcite[@auxout]}}
\def\@bstctlcite[#1]#2{\@bsphack
  \@for\@citeb:=#2\do{%
    \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
    \if@filesw\immediate\write\csname #1\endcsname{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi}%
  \@esphack}

% \IEEEnoauxwrite{} allows for citations that do not add to or affect
% the order of the existing citation list. Can be useful for \cite
% within \thanks{}.
\DeclareRobustCommand{\IEEEnoauxwrite}[1]{\relax
\if@filesw
\@fileswfalse
#1\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax
\@fileswtrue
\else
#1\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax
\fi}

% V1.6 provide a way for a user to execute a command just before 
% a given reference number - used to insert a \newpage to balance
% the columns on the last page
\edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{0}   % the default of zero means that
                              % the command is not executed
\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{\newpage}

% allow the user to alter the triggered command
\long\def\IEEEtriggercmd#1{\long\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{#1}}

% allow user a way to specify the reference number just before the
% command is executed
\def\IEEEtriggeratref#1{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=#1%
\edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA}}%

% trigger command at the given reference
\def\@IEEEbibitemprefix{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtriggerrefnum\relax%
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax%
\ifnum\c@enumiv=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax\@IEEEtriggercmd\relax\fi}


\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]}

% compsoc journals and conferences left align the reference numbers
\@IEEEcompsoconly{\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]\hfill}}

% controls bib item spacing
\def\IEEEbibitemsep{0pt plus .5pt}

\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\IEEEbibitemsep{0.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}}


\def\thebibliography#1{\section*{\refname}%
    \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\refname}%
    % V1.6 add some rubber space here and provide a command trigger
    \footnotesize\vskip 0.3\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip%
    \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
    {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}%
    \leftmargin\labelwidth
    \advance\leftmargin\labelsep\relax
    \itemsep \IEEEbibitemsep\relax
    \usecounter{enumiv}%
    \let\p@enumiv\@empty
    \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
    \let\@IEEElatexbibitem\bibitem%
    \def\bibitem{\@IEEEbibitemprefix\@IEEElatexbibitem}%
\def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em}%
% originally:
%   \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000%
% by adding the \interlinepenalty here, we make it more
% difficult, but not impossible, for LaTeX to break within a reference.
% The IEEE almost never breaks a reference (but they do it more often with
% technotes). You may get an underfull vbox warning around the bibliography, 
% but the final result will be much more like what the IEEE will publish. 
% MDS 11/2000
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty100%
\else\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty500\fi%
    \sfcode`\.=1000\relax}
\let\endthebibliography=\endlist




% TITLE PAGE COMMANDS
% 
% 
% \IEEEmembership is used to produce the sublargesize italic font used to indicate author 
% IEEE membership. compsoc uses a large size sans slant font
\def\IEEEmembership#1{{\@IEEEnotcompsoconly{\sublargesize}\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\textit{#1}}}
 

% \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a footnote type symbol to indicate author affiliation.
% When given an argument of 1 to 9, \IEEEauthorrefmark{} follows the standard LaTeX footnote
% symbol sequence convention. However, for arguments 10 and above, \IEEEauthorrefmark{} 
% reverts to using lower case roman numerals, so it cannot overflow. Do note that you 
% cannot use \footnotemark[] in place of \IEEEauthorrefmark{} within \author as the footnote
% symbols will have been turned off to prevent \thanks from creating footnote marks.
% \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a symbol that appears to LaTeX as having zero vertical
% height - this allows for a more compact line packing, but the user must ensure that
% the interline spacing is large enough to prevent \IEEEauthorrefmark{} from colliding
% with the text above.
% V1.7 make this a robust command
% V1.8 transmag uses an arabic author affiliation symbol
\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEauthorrefmark}[1]{\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\textsuperscript{\footnotesize #1}}}
\else
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEauthorrefmark}[1]{\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\textsuperscript{\footnotesize\ensuremath{\ifcase#1\or *\or \dagger\or \ddagger\or%
    \mathsection\or \mathparagraph\or \|\or **\or \dagger\dagger%
    \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\textsuperscript{\expandafter\romannumeral#1}\fi}}}}
\fi


% FONT CONTROLS AND SPACINGS FOR CONFERENCE MODE AUTHOR NAME AND AFFILIATION BLOCKS
% 
% The default font styles for the author name and affiliation blocks (confmode)
\def\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize}
\def\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\itshape}\normalsize}
% The default if the user does not use an author block
\def\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize}

% adjustment spacing from title (or special paper notice) to author name blocks (confmode)
% can be negative
\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{-0.25em}
% compsoc conferences need more space here
\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{0.75\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}}

% spacing between name and affiliation blocks (confmode)
% This can be negative.
% The IEEE doesn't want any added spacing here, but I will leave these
% controls in place in case they ever change their mind.
% Personally, I like 0.75ex.
%\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.75ex}
%\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.75ex}
\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.0ex}
\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.0ex}
\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag
% transmag uses one line of space above first affiliation block
\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{1\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}
\fi

% baseline spacing within name and affiliation blocks (confmode)
% must be positive, spacings below certain values will make 
% the position of line of text sensitive to the contents of the
% line above it i.e., whether or not the prior line has descenders, 
% subscripts, etc. For this reason it is a good idea to keep
% these above 2.6ex
\def\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace{2.6ex}
\def\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace{2.75ex}

% This tracks the required strut size.
% See the \@IEEEauthorhalign command for the actual default value used.
\def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex}

% variables to retain font size and style across groups
% values given here have no effect as they will be overwritten later
\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize{10}
\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip{12}
\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding{OT1}
\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily{ptm}
\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries{m}
\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape{n}

% saves the current font attributes
\def\@IEEEcurfontSAVE{\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize\f@size%
\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip\f@baselineskip%
\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding\f@encoding%
\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily\f@family%
\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries\f@series%
\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape\f@shape}

% restores the saved font attributes
\def\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE{\fontsize{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize}{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip}%
\fontencoding{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding}%
\fontfamily{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily}%
\fontseries{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries}%
\fontshape{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape}%
\selectfont}


% variable to indicate if the current block is the first block in the column
\newif\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol   \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse


% the command places a strut with height and depth = \@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace
% we use this technique to have complete manual control over the spacing of the lines
% within the halign environment.
% We set the below baseline portion at 30%, the above
% baseline portion at 70% of the total length.
% Responds to changes in the document's \baselinestretch
\def\@IEEEauthorstrutrule{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace%
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselinestretch\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%
\rule[-0.3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA]{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}}


% blocks to hold the authors' names and affilations. 
% Makes formatting easy for conferences
%
% use real definitions in conference mode
% name block
\def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle% set the default text style
\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}% disable strut for spacer row
% the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs
% for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro
% do a spacer row if needed
\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline\fi
\global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column
%restore the correct strut value
\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace}%
% input the author names
#1%
% end the row if the user did not already
\crcr}
% spacer row for names
\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace}}
%
% affiliation block
\def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle% set the default text style
\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}%disable strut for spacer row
% the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs
% for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro
% do a spacer row if needed
\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline\fi
\global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column
%restore the correct strut value
\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace}%
% input the author affiliations
#1%
% end the row if the user did not already
\crcr
% V1.8 transmag does not use any additional affiliation spacing after the first author
\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0pt}\fi}

% spacer row for affiliations
\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace}}


% allow papers to compile even if author blocks are used in modes other
% than conference or peerreviewca. For such cases, we provide dummy blocks.
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
\else
   \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca\else
      % not conference, peerreviewca or transmag mode
      \ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag\else
         \def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{#1}%
         \def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{#1}%
      \fi
   \fi
\fi



% we provide our own halign so as not to have to depend on tabular
\def\@IEEEauthorhalign{\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle% default text style
   \lineskip=0pt\relax% disable line spacing
   \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax%
   \baselineskip=0pt\relax%
   \@IEEEcurfontSAVE% save the current font
   \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math
   \let\\\@IEEEauthorhaligncr% replace newline with halign friendly one
   \tabskip=0pt\relax% no column spacing
   \everycr{}% ensure no problems here
   \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse% no author blocks yet
   \def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex}% default interline space
   \vtop\bgroup%vtop box
   \halign\bgroup&\relax\hfil\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE\relax ##\relax
   \hfil\@IEEEcurfontSAVE\@IEEEauthorstrutrule\cr}

% ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox
\def\end@IEEEauthorhalign{\crcr\egroup\egroup}

% handle bogus star form
\def\@IEEEauthorhaligncr{{\ifnum0=`}\fi\@ifstar{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}}

% test and setup the optional argument to \\[]
\def\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr{\@testopt\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr\z@skip}

% end the line and do the optional spacer
\def\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}\cr\noalign{\vskip#1\relax}}



% flag to prevent multiple \and warning messages
\newif\if@IEEEWARNand
\@IEEEWARNandtrue

% if in conference or peerreviewca modes, we support the use of \and as \author is a
% tabular environment, otherwise we warn the user that \and is invalid
% outside of conference or peerreviewca modes.
\def\and{\relax} % provide a bogus \and that we will then override

\renewcommand{\and}[1][\relax]{\if@IEEEWARNand\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\and is valid only
                               when in conference or peerreviewca}\typeout{modes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNandfalse}

\ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
\renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}%
\fi
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca
\renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}%
\fi
% V1.8 transmag uses conference author format
\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag
\renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}%
\fi

% page clearing command
% based on LaTeX2e's \cleardoublepage, but allows different page styles
% for the inserted blank pages
\def\@IEEEcleardoublepage#1{\clearpage\if@twoside\ifodd\c@page\else
\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\fi\fi\fi}

% V1.8b hooks to allow adjustment of space above title
\def\IEEEtitletopspace{0.5\baselineskip}
% an added extra amount to allow for adjustment/offset
\def\IEEEtitletopspaceextra{0pt}

% user command to invoke the title page
\def\maketitle{\par%
  \begingroup%
  \normalfont%
  \def\thefootnote{}%  the \thanks{} mark type is empty
  \def\footnotemark{}% and kill space from \thanks within author
  \let\@makefnmark\relax% V1.7, must *really* kill footnotemark to remove all \textsuperscript spacing as well.
  \footnotesize%       equal spacing between thanks lines
  \footnotesep 0.7\baselineskip%see global setting of \footnotesep for more info
  % V1.7 disable \thanks note indention for compsoc
  \@IEEEcompsoconly{\long\def\@makefntext##1{\parindent 1em\noindent\hbox{\@makefnmark}##1}}%
  \normalsize%
  \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
     \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext%
     \thispagestyle{IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle}\@thanks%
  \else
     \if@twocolumn%
        \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%
           \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext%
        \else
           \twocolumn[{\IEEEquantizevspace{\@maketitle}[\IEEEquantizedisabletitlecmds]{0pt}[-\topskip]{\baselineskip}{\@IEEENORMtitlevspace}{\@IEEEMINtitlevspace}\@IEEEaftertitletext}]%
        \fi
     \else
        \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext%
     \fi
     \thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}\@thanks%
  \fi
  % pullup page for pubid if used.
  \if@IEEEusingpubid
     \enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}%
  \fi 
  \endgroup
  \setcounter{footnote}{0}\let\maketitle\relax\let\@maketitle\relax
  \gdef\@thanks{}%
  % v1.6b do not clear these as we will need the title again for peer review papers
  % \gdef\@author{}\gdef\@title{}%
  \let\thanks\relax}


% V1.8 parbox to format \@IEEEtitleabstractindextext
\long\def\@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox#1{\parbox{1\textwidth}{#1}}
% V1.8 compsoc is partial width
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
% comparison with proofs suggests it's in the range of 92.1-92.3%
\long\def\@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox#1{\parbox{0.922\textwidth}{\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\rightskip\@flushglue\leftskip\z@skip}#1}}
\fi

% formats the Title, authors names, affiliations and special paper notice
% THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING COMMAND! Do not allow blank lines or unintentional
% spaces to enter the definition - use % at the end of each line
\def\@maketitle{\newpage
\bgroup\par\vskip\IEEEtitletopspace\vskip\IEEEtitletopspaceextra\centering%
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technotes, V1.8a abstract and index terms are not treated differently for compsoc technotes
   {\bfseries\large\@IEEEcompsoconly{\Large\sffamily}\@title\par}\vskip 1.3em{\lineskip .5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\large\sffamily}\@author
   \@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par}\relax
\else% not a technote
   \vskip0.2em{\Huge\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag\bfseries\LARGE\fi\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\normalfont\normalsize\vskip 2\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
   \bfseries\Large}\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\vskip 0.75\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}\@title\par}\relax
   \@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\vskip 0.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}\vskip1.0em\par%
   % V1.6 handle \author differently if in conference mode
   \ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
      {\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace%
       \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par}\relax
   \else% peerreviewca, peerreview or journal
      \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca
         % peerreviewca handles author names just like conference mode
         {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace%
          \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par
          {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax
           \@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext}\par\noindent\hfill
           \IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax
      \else% journal, peerreview or transmag
         \ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag
            % transmag also handles author names just like conference mode
            % it also uses \@IEEEtitleabstractindextex, but with one line less
            % space above, and one more below
           {\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace%
            \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par
           {\vspace{0.5\baselineskip}\relax\@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext}\vspace{-1\baselineskip}\par}}\relax
         \else% journal or peerreview
           {\lineskip.5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@author\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par
           {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax
            \@IEEEtitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext}\par\noindent\hfill
            \IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax
         \fi
      \fi
   \fi
\fi\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup}


% V1.7 Computer Society "diamond line" which follows index terms for nonconference papers
% V1.8a full width diamond line for single column use
\def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlinei{\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\nobreak\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak
\raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}\nobreak
\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\relax}
% V1.8a narrower width diamond line for double column use
\def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineii{\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 2.5cm\nobreak\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak
\raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}\nobreak
\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 2.5cm\relax}
% V1.8a bare core without rules to base a last resort on for very narrow linewidths
\def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineiii{\mbox{}\nobreak\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak
\raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}\nobreak
\hspace{7.5pt}\nobreak\mbox{}\relax}

% V1.8a allow \IEEEcompsocdiamondline to adjust for different linewidths.
% Use \@IEEEcompsocdiamondlinei if its width is less than 0.66\linewidth (0.487 nominal for single column)
% if not, fall back to \@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineii if its width is less than 0.75\linewidth (0.659 nominal for double column)
% if all else fails, try to make a custom diamondline based on the abnormally narrow linewidth
\def\IEEEcompsocdiamondline{\settowidth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlinei}\relax
\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA<0.66\linewidth\relax\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlinei\relax
\else
\settowidth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineii}\relax
\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA<0.75\linewidth\relax\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineii\relax
\else
\settowidth{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineiii}\relax
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=\linewidth\relax
\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{-1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\relax
\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 0.33\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\@IEEEcompsocdiamondlineiii\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 0.33\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax
\fi\fi}


% V1.7 standard LateX2e \thanks, but with \itshape under compsoc. Also make it a \long\def
% We also need to trigger the one-shot footnote rule
\def\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule{\global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoteruletrue}


\long\def\thanks#1{\footnotemark
    \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks
        \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\itshape
        \protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule\relax}\ignorespaces#1}}}
\let\@thanks\@empty


% V1.7 allow \author to contain \par's. This is needed to allow \thanks to contain \par.
\long\def\author#1{\gdef\@author{#1}}


% in addition to setting up IEEEitemize, we need to remove a baselineskip space above and
% below it because \list's \pars introduce blank lines because of the footnote struts.
\def\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist{\def\labelitemi{$\bullet$}%
\setlength{\IEEElabelindent}{0pt}\setlength{\labelsep}{1.2em}\setlength{\parskip}{0pt}%
\setlength{\partopsep}{0pt}\setlength{\topsep}{0.5\baselineskip}\vspace{-1\baselineskip}\relax}


% flag for fake non-compsoc \IEEEcompsocthanksitem - prevents line break on very first item
\newif\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem \@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse

\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
% V1.7 compsoc bullet item \thanks
% also, we need to redefine this to destroy the argument in \IEEEquantizevspace
\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\relax\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse\footnotemark
    \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks
        \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\itshape\protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule
        {\let\IEEEiedlistdecl\relax\protect\begin{IEEEitemize}[\protect\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist]\ignorespaces#1\relax
        \protect\end{IEEEitemize}}\protect\vspace{-1\baselineskip}}}}
\DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\item}
\else
% non-compsoc, allow for dual compilation via rerouting to normal \thanks
\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\thanks{#1}}
% redirect to "pseudo-par" \hfil\break\indent after swallowing [] from \IEEEcompsocthanksitem[]
\DeclareRobustCommand{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg}%
{\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[\relax]}}
% be sure and break only after first item, be sure and ignore spaces after optional argument
\def\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[#1]{\relax\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem\hfil\break
\indent\fi\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemtrue\ignorespaces}
\fi


% V1.6b define the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle as needed
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
\def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\@IEEEcleardoublepage{empty}%
\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn
\twocolumn[{\IEEEquantizevspace{\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle}[\IEEEquantizedisabletitlecmds]{0pt}[-\topskip]{\baselineskip}{\@IEEENORMtitlevspace}{\@IEEEMINtitlevspace}}]
\else
\newpage\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip
\fi
\thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}}
\else
% \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle does nothing if peer review option has not been selected
\def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\relax}
\fi

% peerreview formats the repeated title like the title in journal papers.
\def\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}%
\normalfont\normalsize\vskip0.2em{\Huge\@title\par}\vskip1.0em\par
\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup}



% V1.6 
% this is a static rubber spacer between the title/authors and the main text
% used for single column text, or when the title appears in the first column
% of two column text (technotes). 
\def\@IEEEstatictitlevskip{{\normalfont\normalsize
% adjust spacing to next text
% v1.6b handle peer review papers
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
% for peer review papers, the same value is used for both title pages
% regardless of the other paper modes
   \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip
\else
   \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% conference
      \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip%
   \else%
      \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technote
         \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip%
      \else% journal uses more space
         \vskip 2.5\baselineskip plus 0.75\baselineskip minus 0.375\baselineskip%
      \fi
   \fi
\fi}}


% set the nominal and minimum values for the quantized title spacer
% the quantization algorithm will not allow the spacer size to
% become less than \@IEEEMINtitlevspace - instead it will be lengthened
% default to journal values
\def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{2.5\baselineskip}
\def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{2\baselineskip}
% conferences and technotes need tighter spacing
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% conference
  \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}
  \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}
\fi
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technote
  \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}
  \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}
\fi


% V1.8a
\def\IEEEquantizevspace{\begingroup\@ifstar{\@IEEEquantizevspacestarformtrue\@IEEEquantizevspace}{\@IEEEquantizevspacestarformfalse\@IEEEquantizevspace}}
% \IEEEquantizevspace[output dimen register]{object}[object decl]
%                    {top baselineskip}
%                    [offset][prevdepth][lineskip limit][lineskip]
%                    {unit height}{nominal vspace}{minimum vspace}
%
% Calculates and creates the vspace needed to make the combined height with
% the given object an integer multiple of the given unit height. This command
% is more general than the older \@IEEEdynamictitlevspace it replaces.
%
% The star form has no effect at present, but is reserved for future use.
%
% If the optional argument [output dimen register] is given, the calculated
% vspace height is stored in the given output dimen (or skip) register
% and no other action is taken, otherwise the object followed by a vspace*
% of the appropriate height is evaluated/output.
%
% The optional object decl (declarations) is code that is evaluated just
% before the object's height is evaluated. Its intented purpose is to allow
% for the alteration or disabling of code within the object during internal
% height evaluation (e.g., \long\def\thanks#1{\relax} ).
% This special code is not invoked if/when the object is rendered at the end.
%
% The nominal vspace is the target value of the added vspace and the minimum
% vspace is the lower allowed limit. The vspacer will be the value that achieves
% integral overall height, in terms of the given unit height, that is closest
% to the nominal vspace and that is not less than the specified minimum vspace.
%
% The line spacing algorithm of TeX is somewhat involved and requires special
% care with regard to the first line of a vertical list (which is indicated
% when \prevdepth is -1000pt or less). top baselineskip specifies the
% baselineskip or topskip used prior to the object. If the height of the
% first line of the object is greater than the given top baselineskip, then
% the top baselineskip is subtracted from the height of the first line and
% that difference is considered along with the rest of the object height
% (because the object will be shifted down by an amount = 
% top line height - top baselineskip). Otherwise, the height of the first line
% of the object is ignored as far as the calculations are concerned.
% This algorithm is adequate for objects that appear at the top of a page
% (e.g., titles) where \topskip spacing is used.
%
% However, as explained on page 78 of the TeXbook, interline spacing is more
% complex when \baselineskip is being used (indicated by \prevdepth > 
% -1000pt). The four optional parameters offset, prevdepth, lineskip limit and
% lineskip are assumed to be equal to be 0pt, \prevdepth, \lineskiplimit and
% \lineskip, respectively, if they are omitted.
%
% The prevdepth is the depth of the line before the object, the lineskip limit
% specifies how close the top of the object can come to the bottom of the
% previous line before \baselineskip is ignored and \lineskip is inserted
% between the object and the line above it. Lineskip does not come into
% play unless the first line of the object is high enough to "get too close"
% (as specified by lineskiplimit) to the line before it. The the prevdepth,
% lineskip limit, and lineskip optional parameters are not needed for the
% first object/line on a page (i.e., prevdepth <= -1000pt) where the simplier
% \topskip spacing rules are in effect.
%
% Offset is a manual adjustment that is added to the height calculations of
% object irrespective of the value of \prevdepth. It is useful when the top
% baselineskip will result in a noninteger unit height object placement even
% if the object itself has integral height. e.g., a footnotesize baselineskip
% is used before the object, thus an offset of, say -3pt, can be given as a
% correction.

% Common combinations of these parameters include:
%
% top baselineskip:   (and default values for offset, prevdepth, etc.)
% \topskip            % for objects that appear at the top of a page
% \maxdimen           % always ignore the height of the top line
% 0pt                 % always consider any positive height of the top line
%
% for objects to appear inline in normal text:
% top baselineskip = \baselineskip
%
% set prevdepth = -1000pt and top baselineskip = 0pt to consider the
% overall height of the object without any other external skip
% consideration

\newif\if@IEEEquantizevspacestarform       % flag to indicate star form
\newif\if@IEEEquantizevspaceuseoutdimenreg % flag to indicate output dimen register is to be used
% Use our own private registers because the object could contain a
% structure that uses the existing tmp scratch pad registers
\newdimen\@IEEEquantizeheightA
\newdimen\@IEEEquantizeheightB
\newdimen\@IEEEquantizeheightC
\newdimen\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth % need to save this early as can change
\newcount\@IEEEquantizemultiple
\newbox\@IEEEquantizeboxA


\def\@IEEEquantizevspace{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEquantizevspaceuseoutdimenregtrue\@@IEEEquantizevspace}{\@IEEEquantizevspaceuseoutdimenregfalse\@@IEEEquantizevspace[]}}


\long\def\@@IEEEquantizevspace[#1]#2{\relax
% acquire and store
% #1 optional output dimen register
% #2 object
\edef\@IEEEquantizeoutdimenreg{#1}\relax
% allow for object specifications that contain parameters
\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={#2}\relax
\long\edef\@IEEEquantizeobject{\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA}\relax
\@ifnextchar [{\@@@IEEEquantizevspace}{\@@@IEEEquantizevspace[\relax]}}

\long\def\@@@IEEEquantizevspace[#1]#2{\relax
% acquire and store
% [#1] optional object decl, is \relax if not given by user
% #2 top baselineskip
% allow for object decl specifications that have parameters
\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={#1}\relax
\long\edef\@IEEEquantizeobjectdecl{\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA}\relax
\edef\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip{#2}\ivIEEEquantizevspace}

% acquire optional argument set and store
% [offset][prevdepth][lineskip limit][lineskip]
\def\ivIEEEquantizevspace{\@ifnextchar [{\@vIEEEquantizevspace}{\@vIEEEquantizevspace[0pt]}}
\def\@vIEEEquantizevspace[#1]{\edef\@IEEEquantizeoffset{#1}\@ifnextchar [{\@viIEEEquantizevspace}{\@viIEEEquantizevspace[\prevdepth]}}
\def\@viIEEEquantizevspace[#1]{\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth=#1\relax\@ifnextchar [{\@viiIEEEquantizevspace}{\@viiIEEEquantizevspace[\lineskiplimit]}}
\def\@viiIEEEquantizevspace[#1]{\edef\@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit{#1}\@ifnextchar [{\@viiiIEEEquantizevspace}{\@viiiIEEEquantizevspace[\lineskip]}}
\def\@viiiIEEEquantizevspace[#1]{\edef\@IEEEquantizelineskip{#1}\@ixIEEEquantizevspace}

% main routine
\def\@ixIEEEquantizevspace#1#2#3{\relax
\edef\@IEEEquantizeunitheight{#1}\relax
\edef\@IEEEquantizenomvspace{#2}\relax
\edef\@IEEEquantizeminvspace{#3}\relax
% \@IEEEquantizeoutdimenreg
% \@IEEEquantizeobject
% \@IEEEquantizeobjectdecl
% \@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip
% \@IEEEquantizeoffset
% \@IEEEquantizeprevdepth
% \@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit
% \@IEEEquantizelineskip
% \@IEEEquantizeunitheight
% \@IEEEquantizenomvspace
% \@IEEEquantizeminvspace
% get overall height of object
\setbox\@IEEEquantizeboxA\vbox{\begingroup\@IEEEquantizeobjectdecl\@IEEEquantizeobject\relax\endgroup}\relax
\@IEEEquantizeheightA\ht\@IEEEquantizeboxA\relax
% get height of first line of object
\setbox\@IEEEquantizeboxA\vtop{\begingroup\@IEEEquantizeobjectdecl\@IEEEquantizeobject\relax\endgroup}\relax
\@IEEEquantizeheightB\ht\@IEEEquantizeboxA\relax
\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth>-1000pt\relax % prevdepth > -1000pf means full baselineskip\lineskip rules in effect
% lineskip spacing rule takes effect if height of top line > baselineskip - prevdepth - lineskiplimit, 
% otherwise the baselineskip rule is in effect and the height of the first line does not matter at all.
\@IEEEquantizeheightC=\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip\relax
\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC-\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth\relax
\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC-\@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit\relax % this works even though \@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit is a macro because TeX allows --10pt notation
\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeheightB>\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax
% lineskip spacing rule is in effect i.e., the object is going to be shifted down relative to the
% baselineskip set position by its top line height (already a part of the total height) + prevdepth + lineskip - baselineskip
\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA\@IEEEquantizeprevdepth\relax
\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA\@IEEEquantizelineskip\relax
\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip\relax
\else
% height of first line <= \@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip - \@IEEEquantizeprevdepth - \@IEEEquantizelineskiplimit
% standard baselineskip rules are in effect, so don't consider height of first line
\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax
\fi
%
\else % prevdepth <= -1000pt, simplier \topskip type rules in effect
\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeheightB>\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip
% height of top line (already included in the total height) in excess of
% baselineskip is the amount it will be downshifted
\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizetopbaselineskip\relax
\else
% height of first line is irrelevant, remove it
\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax
\fi
\fi % prevdepth <= -1000pt
%
% adjust height for any manual offset
\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA\@IEEEquantizeoffset\relax
% add in nominal spacer
\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA\@IEEEquantizenomvspace\relax
% check for nonzero unitheight
\@IEEEquantizeheightB=\@IEEEquantizeunitheight\relax
\ifnum\@IEEEquantizeheightB=0\relax
\@IEEEclspkgerror{IEEEquantizevspace unit height cannot be zero. Assuming 10pt.}%
{Division by zero is not allowed.}
\@IEEEquantizeheightB=10pt\relax
\fi
% get integer number of lines
\@IEEEquantizemultiple=\@IEEEquantizeheightA\relax
\divide\@IEEEquantizemultiple\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax
% set A to contain the excess height over the \@IEEEquantizemultiple of lines
% A = height - multiple*unitheight
\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax
\multiply\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizemultiple\relax
\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightA-\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax
% set B to contain the height short of \@IEEEquantizemultiple+1 of lines
% B = unitheight - A
\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightB-\@IEEEquantizeheightA\relax
% choose A or B based on which is closer
\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizenomvspace\relax
\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeheightA<\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax
% C = nomvspace - A, go with lower
\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC-\@IEEEquantizeheightA\relax
\else
% C = nomvspace + B, go with upper
\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax
\fi
% if violate lower bound, use next integer bound
\ifdim\@IEEEquantizeheightC<\@IEEEquantizeminvspace\relax
% A + B = unitheight
\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightA\relax
\advance\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightB\relax
\fi
% export object and spacer outside of group
\global\let\@IEEEquantizeobjectout\@IEEEquantizeobject\relax
\global\@IEEEquantizeheightC\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax
\endgroup
\if@IEEEquantizevspaceuseoutdimenreg
\@IEEEquantizeoutdimenreg=\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax
\else
\@IEEEquantizeobjectout\relax
\vskip\@IEEEquantizeheightC\relax
\fi}


% user command to disable all global assignments, possible use within object decl
\def\IEEEquantizedisableglobal{\let\global\relax
\let\gdef\def
\let\xdef\edef}
% user command to allow for the disabling of \thanks and other commands, possible use within object decl
\def\IEEEquantizedisabletitlecmds{\long\def\thanks##1{\relax}\relax
\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks##1{\relax}\def\newpage{\relax}}





% V1.6
% we allow the user access to the last part of the title area
% useful in emergencies such as when a different spacing is needed
% This text is NOT compensated for in the dynamic sizer.
\let\@IEEEaftertitletext=\relax
\long\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\def\@IEEEaftertitletext{#1}}


% V1.7 provide a way for users to enter abstract and keywords
% into the onecolumn title are. This text is compensated for
% in the dynamic sizer.
\let\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext=\relax
\long\def\IEEEtitleabstractindextext#1{\def\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext{#1}}

% V1.7 provide a way for users to get the \@IEEEtitleabstractindextext if
% not in compsoc or transmag journal mode - this way abstract and keywords
% can still be placed in their conventional position if not in those modes.
\def\IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext{%
% display for all conference formats
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext\relax
\else% non-conferences
  % V1.8a display for all technotes
  \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\@IEEEtitleabstractindextext\relax
  % V1.8a add diamond line after abstract and index terms for compsoc technotes
  \@IEEEcompsoconly{\noindent\hfill\IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}\relax
  \else % non-conferences and non-technotes
    \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc% display if not compsoc and not transmag
    \else
      \ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag
      \else% not compsoc journal nor transmag journal
         \@IEEEtitleabstractindextext\relax
      \fi
    \fi
  \fi
\fi}


% command to allow alteration of baselinestretch, but only if the current
% baselineskip is unity. Used to tweak the compsoc abstract and keywords line spacing.
\def\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch#1{{\def\baselinestretch{1}\selectfont
\global\@tempskipa\baselineskip}\ifnum\@tempskipa=\baselineskip%
\def\baselinestretch{#1}\selectfont\fi\relax}


% abstract and keywords are in \small, except 
% for 9pt docs in which they are in \footnotesize
% Because 9pt docs use an 8pt footnotesize, \small
% becomes a rather awkward 8.5pt
\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\small}
\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine
 \def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize}
\fi

% compsoc journals use \footnotesize, compsoc conferences use normalsize
\@IEEEcompsoconly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize}}
\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\small}}


% V1.6 have abstract and keywords strip leading spaces, pars and newlines
% so that spacing is more tightly controlled.
\def\abstract{\normalfont
    \if@twocolumn
      \@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\textit{\abstractname}---\relax
    \else
      \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize
    \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
% V1.6 The IEEE wants only 1 pica from end of abstract to introduction heading when in 
% conference mode (the heading already has this much above it)
\def\endabstract{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\vspace{0ex}\else\vspace{1.34ex}\fi\par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi
    \normalfont\normalsize}

\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont
    \if@twocolumn
      \@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\textit{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax
    \else
      \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize
    \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
\def\endIEEEkeywords{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\vspace{1.34ex}\else\vspace{0.67ex}\fi
    \par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi%
    \normalfont\normalsize}

% V1.7 compsoc keywords index terms
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference
\def\abstract{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\bfseries
    \if@twocolumn
      \@IEEEabskeysecsize\noindent\textit{\abstractname}---\relax
    \else
      \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
    \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\bfseries
    \if@twocolumn
      \@IEEEabskeysecsize\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip\noindent
      \textit{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax
    \else
      \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
    \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
  \else% compsoc not conference
\def\abstract{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily
    \if@twocolumn
      \@IEEEabskeysecsize\noindent\textbf{\abstractname}---\relax
    \else
      \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
    \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily
    \if@twocolumn
      \@IEEEabskeysecsize\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip\noindent
      \textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax
    \else
      \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
    \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
  \fi
\fi

% V1.8 transmag keywords index terms
% no abstract name, use indentation
\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag
\def\abstract{\normalfont\parindent 1em\relax
    \if@twocolumn
      \@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\indent
    \else
      \bgroup\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\centering\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize
      \textbf{\abstractname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize
    \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}

\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\parindent 1em\relax
    \if@twocolumn
      \@IEEEabskeysecsize\vspace{1\baselineskip}\bfseries\indent\textit{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax
    \else
      \bgroup\par\vspace{1\baselineskip}\centering\@IEEEabskeysecsize
      \textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\par\addvspace{0.5\baselineskip}\egroup\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize
    \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
\fi



% gobbles all leading \, \\ and \par, upon finding first token that
% is not a \ , \\ or a \par, it ceases and returns that token
% 
% used to strip leading \, \\ and \par from the input
% so that such things in the beginning of an environment will not
% affect the formatting of the text
\long\def\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP#1{\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=0%
\let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken#1%
\let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken=\par%
\let\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken=\\%
\let\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken=\ %
\def\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO{\ }%
\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken%
\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
\fi%
\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken%
\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
\fi%
\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken%
\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
\fi%
% a control space will come in as a macro
% when it is the last one on a line
\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO%
\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
\fi%
% if we have to swallow this token, do so and taste the next one
% else spit it out and stop gobbling
\ifx\@IEEEswallowthistoken 1\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP\else%
\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=#1\fi%
\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP}%




% TITLING OF SECTIONS
\def\@IEEEsectpunct{:\ \,}  % Punctuation after run-in section heading  (headings which are
                            % part of the paragraphs), need little bit more than a single space
                            % spacing from section number to title
% compsoc conferences use regular period/space punctuation
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
\def\@IEEEsectpunct{.\ }
\fi\fi


\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 0.5em\relax}

\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
% compsoc journals need extra spacing
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else
\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 1em\relax}
\fi\fi

%v1.7 put {} after #6 to allow for some types of user font control
%and use \@@par rather than \par
\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%
  \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth
     \let\@svsec\@empty
  \else
     \refstepcounter{#1}%
     % load section label and spacer into \@svsec
     \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}%
  \fi%
  \@tempskipa #5\relax
  \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@% tempskipa determines whether is treated as a high
     \begingroup #6{\relax% or low level heading
      \noindent % subsections are NOT indented
       % print top level headings. \@svsec is label, #8 is heading title
       % The IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal
       {\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}{\interlinepenalty \@M #8\@@par}}%
     \endgroup
     \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else
               \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}%
  \else % printout low level headings
     % svsechd seems to swallow the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{}
     % got rid of sectionmark stuff
     \def\@svsechd{#6{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec #8\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}%
     \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else
               \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}}%
  \fi%skip down
  \@xsect{#5}}


% section* handler
%v1.7 put {} after #4 to allow for some types of user font control
%and use \@@par rather than \par
\def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{\@tempskipa #3\relax
  \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
     %\begingroup #4\@hangfrom{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\par}\endgroup
     % The IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal
     \begingroup \noindent #4{\relax{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\@@par}}\endgroup
  % svsechd swallows the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{}
  \else \def\@svsechd{#4{\hskip #1\relax #5\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}}\fi
  \@xsect{#3}}


%% SECTION heading spacing and font
%%
% arguments are: #1 - sectiontype name
% (for \@sect)   #2 - section level
%                #3 - section heading indent
%                #4 - top separation (absolute value used, neg indicates not to indent main text)
%                     If negative, make stretch parts negative too!
%                #5 - (absolute value used) positive: bottom separation after heading,
%                      negative: amount to indent main text after heading
%                Both #4 and #5 negative means to indent main text and use negative top separation
%                #6 - font control
% You've got to have \normalfont\normalsize in the font specs below to prevent
% trouble when you do something like:
% \section{Note}{\ttfamily TT-TEXT} is known to ... 
% The IEEE sometimes REALLY stretches the area before a section
% heading by up to about 0.5in. However, it may not be a good
% idea to let LaTeX have quite this much rubber.
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
% The IEEE wants section heading spacing to decrease for conference mode
\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}%
{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}%
\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}%
{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
\else % for journals
\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{3.0ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}% V1.6 3.0ex from 3.5ex
{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}%
\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{3.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}%
{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
\fi

% for both journals and conferences
% decided to put in a little rubber above the section, might help somebody
\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}%
{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}%
{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%


% compsoc
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
% compsoc conference
\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}%
{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\large\bfseries}}%
\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}%
{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\sublargesize\bfseries}}%
\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}%
{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}%
\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}%
{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}%
\else% compsoc journals
% use negative top separation as compsoc journals do not indent paragraphs after section titles
\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-3.5ex plus -2ex minus -1.5ex}%
{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\sublargesize\sffamily\bfseries\scshape}}%
% Note that subsection and smaller may not be correct for the Computer Society,
% I have to look up an example.
\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{-3.5ex plus -1.5ex minus -1.5ex}%
{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\bfseries}}%
\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{-2.5ex plus -1ex minus -1ex}%
{0.5ex plus 0.5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\itshape}}%
\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{-0ex plus -0.1ex minus -0.1ex}%
{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}%
\fi\fi

% transmag
\ifCLASSOPTIONtransmag
\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{0.75\parindent}{3.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}%
{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{1.25\parindent}{0.1ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}%
{0.1ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
\fi


% V1.8a provide for a raised line Introduction section for use with Computer
% Society papers. We have to remove any spacing glue after the section
% heading and then remove the blank line for the new paragraph after it.
% LaTeX's section handler alters \everypar and we need to propogate those
% changes outside of the \parbox lest there be spacing problems at the top
% of the next section.
\def\IEEEraisesectionheading#1{\noindent\raisebox{1.5\baselineskip}[0pt][0pt]{\parbox[b]{\columnwidth}{#1\unskip\global\everypar=\everypar}}\vspace{-1\baselineskip}\vspace{-\parskip}\par}



%% ENVIRONMENTS
% "box" symbols at end of proofs
\def\IEEEQEDclosed{\mbox{\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{1.3ex}}} % for a filled box
% V1.6 some journals use an open box instead that will just fit around a closed one
\def\IEEEQEDopen{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.2pt}\fbox{\rule[0pt]{0pt}{1.3ex}\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{0pt}}}}
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
\def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDopen}   % default to open for compsoc
\else
\def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDclosed} % otherwise default to closed
\fi

%V1.8 flag to indicate if QED symbol is to be shown
\newif\if@IEEEQEDshow  \@IEEEQEDshowtrue
\def\IEEEproofindentspace{2\parindent}% V1.8 allow user to change indentation amount if desired
% v1.7 name change to avoid namespace collision with amsthm. Also add support
% for an optional argument.
\def\IEEEproof{\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEproof}{\@IEEEproof[\IEEEproofname]}}
\def\@IEEEproof[#1]{\@IEEEQEDshowtrue\par\noindent\hspace{\IEEEproofindentspace}{\itshape #1: }}
\def\endIEEEproof{\if@IEEEQEDshow\hspace*{\fill}\nobreakspace\IEEEQED\fi\par}
% qedhere for equation environments, similar to AMS \qedhere
\def\IEEEQEDhereeqn{\global\@IEEEQEDshowfalse\eqno\let\eqno\relax\let\leqno\relax
                    \let\veqno\relax\hbox{\IEEEQED}}
% IEEE style qedhere for IEEEeqnarray and other environments
\def\IEEEQEDhere{\global\@IEEEQEDshowfalse\IEEEQED}
% command to disable QED at end of IEEEproof
\def\IEEEQEDoff{\global\@IEEEQEDshowfalse}


%\itemindent is set to \z@ by list, so define new temporary variable
\newdimen\@IEEEtmpitemindent

\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
% V1.8a compsoc uses bold theorem titles, a period instead of a colon, vertical spacing, and hanging indentation
% V1.8 allow long theorem names to break across lines.
% Thanks to Miquel Payaro for reporting this.
\def\@begintheorem#1#2{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\relax
    \topsep 0.2\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip plus 0.26\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip minus 0.05\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
    \rmfamily\trivlist\hangindent\parindent%
    \item[]\textit{\bfseries\noindent #1\ #2.} \itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent\relax}
\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\relax
\topsep 0.2\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip plus 0.26\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip minus 0.05\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
\rmfamily\trivlist\hangindent\parindent%
% V1.6 The IEEE is back to using () around theorem names which are also in italics
% Thanks to Christian Peel for reporting this.
    \item[]\textit{\bfseries\noindent #1\ #2\ (#3).} \itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent\relax}
% V1.7 remove bogus \unskip that caused equations in theorems to collide with
% lines below.
\def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist\vskip 0.25\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip plus 0.26\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip minus 0.05\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}
\else
%
% noncompsoc
% 
% V1.8 allow long theorem names to break across lines.
% Thanks to Miquel Payaro for reporting this.
\def\@begintheorem#1#2{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\relax\topsep 0pt\rmfamily\trivlist%
    \item[]\textit{\indent #1\ #2:} \itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent\relax}
\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\relax\topsep 0pt\rmfamily \trivlist%
% V1.6 The IEEE is back to using () around theorem names which are also in italics
% Thanks to Christian Peel for reporting this.
    \item[]\textit{\indent #1\ #2\ (#3):} \itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent\relax}
% V1.7 remove bogus \unskip that caused equations in theorems to collide with
% lines below.
\def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist}
\fi



% V1.6
% display command for the section the theorem is in - so that \thesection
% is not used as this will be in Roman numerals when we want arabic.
% LaTeX2e uses \def\@thmcounter#1{\noexpand\arabic{#1}} for the theorem number
% (second part) display and \def\@thmcountersep{.} as a separator.
% V1.7 intercept calls to the section counter and reroute to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection
% to allow \appendix(ices} to override as needed.
%
% special handler for sections, allows appendix(ices) to override
\gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection#1{\arabic{#1}}
% string macro
\edef\@IEEEstringsection{section}

% redefine the #1#2[#3] form of newtheorem to use a hook to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection
% if section in_counter is used
\def\@xnthm#1#2[#3]{%
  \expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname
    {\@definecounter{#1}\@newctr{#1}[#3]%
     \edef\@IEEEstringtmp{#3}
     \ifx\@IEEEstringtmp\@IEEEstringsection
     \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{%
     \noexpand\@IEEEthmcounterinsection{#3}\@thmcountersep
          \@thmcounter{#1}}%
     \else
     \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{%
       \expandafter\noexpand\csname the#3\endcsname \@thmcountersep
          \@thmcounter{#1}}%
     \fi
     \global\@namedef{#1}{\@thm{#1}{#2}}%
     \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}}



%% SET UP THE DEFAULT PAGESTYLE
\pagestyle{headings}
\pagenumbering{arabic}

% normally the page counter starts at 1
\setcounter{page}{1}
% however, for peerreview the cover sheet is page 0 or page -1
% (for duplex printing)
\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
   \if@twoside
      \setcounter{page}{-1}
   \else
      \setcounter{page}{0}
   \fi
\fi

% standard book class behavior - let bottom line float up and down as
% needed when single sided
\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside\else\raggedbottom\fi
% if two column - turn on twocolumn, allow word spacings to stretch more and
% enforce a rigid position for the last lines
\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn
% the peer review option delays invoking twocolumn
   \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else
      \twocolumn
   \fi
\sloppy 
\flushbottom
\fi




% \APPENDIX and \APPENDICES definitions

% This is the \@ifmtarg command from the LaTeX ifmtarg package
% by Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau
% \@ifmtarg is used to determine if an argument to a command
% is present or not.
% For instance:
% \@ifmtarg{#1}{\typeout{empty}}{\typeout{has something}}
% \@ifmtarg is used with our redefined \section command if
% \appendices is invoked.
% The command \section will behave slightly differently depending
% on whether the user specifies a title: 
% \section{My appendix title}
% or not:
% \section{}
% This way, we can eliminate the blank lines where the title
% would be, and the unneeded : after Appendix in the table of
% contents 
\begingroup
\catcode`\Q=3
\long\gdef\@ifmtarg#1{\@xifmtarg#1QQ\@secondoftwo\@firstoftwo\@nil}
\long\gdef\@xifmtarg#1#2Q#3#4#5\@nil{#4}
\endgroup
% end of \@ifmtarg defs


% V1.7
% command that allows the one time saving of the original definition
% of section to \@IEEEappendixsavesection for \appendix or \appendices 
% we don't save \section here as it may be redefined later by other
% packages (hyperref.sty, etc.)
\def\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce{\let\@IEEEappendixsavesection\section
\let\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\relax}

% neat trick to grab and process the argument from \section{argument}
% we process differently if the user invoked \section{} with no
% argument (title)
% note we reroute the call to the old \section*
\def\@IEEEprocessthesectionargument#1{%
\@ifmtarg{#1}{%
\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname\nobreakspace\thesectiondis}%
\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname\nobreakspace\thesection}}{%
\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname\nobreakspace\thesectiondis\\* #1}%
\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname\nobreakspace\thesection: #1}}}

% we use this if the user calls \section{} after
% \appendix-- which has no meaning. So, we ignore the
% command and its argument. Then, warn the user.
\def\@IEEEdestroythesectionargument#1{\typeout{** WARNING: Ignoring useless
\protect\section\space in Appendix (line \the\inputlineno).}}


% remember \thesection forms will be displayed in \ref calls
% and in the Table of Contents.
% The \sectiondis form is used in the actual heading itself

% appendix command for one single appendix
% normally has no heading. However, if you want a 
% heading, you can do so via the optional argument:
% \appendix[Optional Heading]
\def\appendix{\relax}
\renewcommand{\appendix}[1][]{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par
    % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique
    \gdef\theHsection{Appendix.A}%
    % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section
    \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}%
    \setcounter{section}{0}%
    \setcounter{subsection}{0}%
    \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}%
    \setcounter{paragraph}{0}%
    \gdef\thesection{A}%
    \gdef\thesectiondis{}% 
    \gdef\thesubsection{\Alph{subsection}}%
    \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A}
    \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter
    \@ifmtarg{#1}{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname}%
                  \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname}}{%
             \@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname\nobreakspace\\* #1}%
             \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname: #1}}%
    % redefine \section command for appendix
    % leave \section* as is
    \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{%
                    \@IEEEdestroythesectionargument}}% throw out the argument
                                                     % of the normal form
}



% appendices command for multiple appendices
% user then calls \section with an argument (possibly empty) to
% declare the individual appendices
\def\appendices{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par
    % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique
    \gdef\theHsection{Appendix.\Alph{section}}%
    % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section
    \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}%
    \setcounter{section}{-1}% we want \refstepcounter to use section 0
    \setcounter{subsection}{0}%
    \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}%
    \setcounter{paragraph}{0}%
    \ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices%
    \gdef\thesection{\Roman{section}}%
    \gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}}%
    \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}.}}%
    \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A\arabic{##1}}
    \else%
    \gdef\thesection{\Alph{section}}%
    \gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}}%
    \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}.}}%
    \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{\Alph{##1}}
    \fi%
    \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter
    \setcounter{section}{0}% NEXT \section will be the FIRST appendix
    % redefine \section command for appendices
    % leave \section* as is
    \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{% process the *-form
                    \refstepcounter{section}% or is a new section so,
                    \@IEEEprocessthesectionargument}}% process the argument 
                                                 % of the normal form
}



% V1.7 compoc uses nonbold drop cap and small caps word style
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
  \def\IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\mdseries}
  \def\IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\scshape}
  \def\IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\relax}
\fi
%
%
% \IEEEPARstart
% Definition for the big two line drop cap letter at the beginning of the
% first paragraph of journal papers. The first argument is the first letter
% of the first word, the second argument is the remaining letters of the
% first word which will be rendered in upper case.
% In V1.6 this has been completely rewritten to:
% 
% 1. no longer have problems when the user begins an environment
%    within the paragraph that uses \IEEEPARstart.
% 2. auto-detect and use the current font family
% 3. revise handling of the space at the end of the first word so that
%    interword glue will now work as normal.
% 4. produce correctly aligned edges for the (two) indented lines.
% 
% We generalize things via control macros - playing with these is fun too.
% 
% V1.7 added more control macros to make it easy for IEEEtrantools.sty users
% to change the font style.
% 
% the number of lines that are indented to clear it
% may need to increase if using decenders
\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartDROPLINES}{2}
% minimum number of lines left on a page to allow a \@IEEEPARstart
% Does not take into consideration rubber shrink, so it tends to
% be overly cautious
\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES}{2}
% V1.7 the height of the drop cap is adjusted to match the height of this text
% in the current font (when \IEEEPARstart is called).
\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT}{T}
% the depth the letter is lowered below the baseline
% the height (and size) of the letter is determined by the sum
% of this value and the height of the \IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current
% font. It is a good idea to set this value in terms of the baselineskip
% so that it can respond to changes therein.
\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}{1.1\baselineskip}
% V1.7 the font the drop cap will be rendered in,
% can take zero or one argument.
\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE}{\bfseries}
% V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify
% the drop cap letter, can take zero or one argument.
\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE}{\MakeUppercase}
% V1.7 the font that will be used to render the rest of the word,
% can take zero or one argument.
\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE}{\relax}
% V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify
% the rest of the word, can take zero or one argument.
\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE}{\MakeUppercase}
% This is the horizontal separation distance from the drop letter to the main text.
% Lengths that depend on the font (e.g., ex, em, etc.) will be referenced
% to the font that is active when \IEEEPARstart is called. 
\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartSEP}{0.15em}
% V1.7 horizontal offset applied to the left of the drop cap.
\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartHOFFSET}{0em}
% V1.7 Italic correction command applied at the end of the drop cap.
\providecommand{\IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}{\/}

% width of the letter output, set globally. Can be used in \IEEEPARstartSEP
% or \IEEEPARstartHOFFSET, but not the height lengths.
\newdimen\IEEEPARstartletwidth
\IEEEPARstartletwidth 0pt\relax

% definition of \IEEEPARstart
% THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING AREA, DO NOT ALLOW SPACES WITHIN THESE LINES
% 
% The token \@IEEEPARstartfont will be globally defined after the first use
% of \IEEEPARstart and will be a font command which creates the big letter
% The first argument is the first letter of the first word and the second
% argument is the rest of the first word(s).
\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{\par{%
% if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start
% on a new one
\@IEEEtranneedspace{\IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES\baselineskip}{\relax}%
% V1.7 move this up here in case user uses \textbf for \IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE
% which uses command \leavevmode which causes an unwanted \indent to be issued
\noindent
% calculate the desired height of the big letter
% it extends from the top of \IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current font
% down to \IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH below the current baseline
\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT}%
\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}%
% extract the name of the current font in bold
% and place it in \@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME
\def\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD##1 ##2\relax{##1}%
{\IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\selectfont\edef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE{\fontname\font\space}%
\xdef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME{\expandafter\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE\relax}}}%
% define a font based on this name with a point size equal to the desired
% height of the drop letter
\font\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax%
% save this value as a counter (integer) value (sp points)
\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%
% now get the height of the actual letter produced by this font size
\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1}}%
% If something bogus happens like the first argument is empty or the
% current font is strange, do not allow a zero height.
\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0pt\relax%
\typeout{** WARNING: IEEEPARstart drop letter has zero height! (line \the\inputlineno)}%
\typeout{ Forcing the drop letter font size to 10pt.}%
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=10pt%
\fi%
% and store it as a counter
\@IEEEtrantmpcountB=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%
% Since a font size doesn't exactly correspond to the height of the capital
% letters in that font, the actual height of the letter, \@IEEEtrantmpcountB,
% will be less than that desired, \@IEEEtrantmpcountA
% we need to raise the font size, \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA 
% by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA / \@IEEEtrantmpcountB
% But, TeX doesn't have floating point division, so we have to use integer
% division. Hence the use of the counters.
% We need to reduce the denominator so that the loss of the remainder will
% have minimal affect on the accuracy of the result
\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by 200%
\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountB%
% Then reequalize things when we use TeX's ability to multiply by
% floating point values
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0.005\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%
\multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
% \@IEEEPARstartfont is globaly set to the calculated font of the big letter
% We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to to create the
% big letter.
\global\font\@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%
% Now set \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA to the width of the big letter
% We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to set the
% hanging indent
\settowidth{\global\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartfont
\IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}}}%
% end of the isolated calculation environment
\global\IEEEPARstartletwidth\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax%
% add in the extra clearance we want
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \IEEEPARstartSEP\relax%
% add in the optional offset
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \IEEEPARstartHOFFSET\relax%
% V1.7 don't allow negative offsets to produce negative hanging indents
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
\ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB < 0 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 0pt\fi
% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA has the width of the big letter plus the
% separation space and \@IEEEPARstartfont is the font we need to use
% Now, we make the letter and issue the hanging indent command
% The letter is placed in a box of zero width and height so that other
% text won't be displaced by it.
\hangindent\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\hangafter=-\IEEEPARstartDROPLINES%
\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}%
\raisebox{-\IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}[0pt][0pt]{\hspace{\IEEEPARstartHOFFSET}%
\@IEEEPARstartfont\IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}%
\hspace{\IEEEPARstartSEP}}}%
{\IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\selectfont#2}}}}




% determines if the space remaining on a given page is equal to or greater
% than the specified space of argument one
% if not, execute argument two (only if the remaining space is greater than zero)
% and issue a \newpage
% 
% example: \@IEEEtranneedspace{2in}{\vfill}
% 
% Does not take into consideration rubber shrinkage, so it tends to
% be overly cautious
% Based on an example posted by Donald Arseneau
% Note this macro uses \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB internally for calculations,
% so DO NOT PASS \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB to this routine
% if you need a dimen register, import with \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA instead
\def\@IEEEtranneedspace#1#2{\penalty-100\begingroup%shield temp variable
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\pagegoal\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB-\pagetotal% space left
\ifdim #1>\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax% not enough space left
\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB>\z@\relax #2\fi%
\newpage%
\fi\endgroup}



% IEEEbiography ENVIRONMENT
% Allows user to enter biography leaving place for picture (adapts to font size)
% As of V1.5, a new optional argument allows you to have a real graphic!
% V1.5 and later also fixes the "colliding biographies" which could happen when a 
% biography's text was shorter than the space for the photo.
% MDS 7/2001
% V1.6 prevent multiple biographies from making multiple TOC entries
\newif\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade
\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadetrue

% biography counter so hyperref can jump directly to the biographies
% and not just the previous section
\newcounter{IEEEbiography}
\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{0}

% photo area size
\def\@IEEEBIOphotowidth{1.0in}    % width of the biography photo area
\def\@IEEEBIOphotodepth{1.25in}   % depth (height) of the biography photo area
% area cleared for photo
\def\@IEEEBIOhangwidth{1.14in}    % width cleared for the biography photo area
\def\@IEEEBIOhangdepth{1.25in}    % depth cleared for the biography photo area
                                  % actual depth will be a multiple of 
                                  % \baselineskip, rounded up
\def\@IEEEBIOskipN{4\baselineskip}% nominal value of the vskip above the biography

\newenvironment{IEEEbiography}[2][]{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize%
\unitlength 1in\parskip=0pt\par\parindent 1em\interlinepenalty500%
% we need enough space to support the hanging indent
% the nominal value of the spacer
% and one extra line for good measure
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth%
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEBIOskipN%
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by 1\baselineskip%
% if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start
% with a new one
\@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\relax}%
% nominal spacer can strech, not shrink use 1fil so user can out stretch with \vfill
\vskip \@IEEEBIOskipN plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip%
% the default box for where the photo goes
\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox{%
\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}\centering PLACE\\ PHOTO\\ HERE \end{minipage}}}}%
%
% detect if the optional argument was supplied, this requires the
% \@ifmtarg command as defined in the appendix section above
% and if so, override the default box with what they want
\@ifmtarg{#1}{\relax}{\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{\mbox{\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}%
\centering%
#1%
\end{minipage}}}}% end if optional argument supplied
% Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before
\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade%
% link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump
% to the biography, not the previous section
\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}%
\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}%
\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse%
\fi%
% one more biography
\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
% Make an entry for this name into the table of contents 
\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#2}%
% V1.6 properly handle if a new paragraph should occur while the
% hanging indent is still active. Do this by redefining \par so
% that it will not start a new paragraph. (But it will appear to the
% user as if it did.) Also, strip any leading pars, newlines, or spaces.
\let\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD=\par% save the original \par command
\edef\par{\hfil\break\indent}% the new \par will not be a "real" \par
\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}% get height of biography box
\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth%
\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% countA has the hang depth
\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \baselineskip%  calculates lines needed to produce the hang depth
\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by 1% ensure we overestimate
% set the hanging indent
\hangindent\@IEEEBIOhangwidth%
\hangafter-\@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
% reference the top of the photo area to the top of a capital T
\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\mbox{T}}%
% set the photo box, give it zero width and height so as not to disturb anything
\noindent\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEBIOhangwidth}\raisebox{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}[0pt][0pt]{%
\raisebox{-\@IEEEBIOphotodepth}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}}}%
% now place the author name and begin the bio text
\noindent\textbf{#2\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\let\par=\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD\par%
% 7/2001 V1.5 detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo area
% and pad the unused area - preventing a collision from the next biography entry
% MDS
\ifnum \prevgraf <\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax% detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo
    \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -\prevgraf% calculate how many lines we need to pad
    \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax% we compensate for the fact that we indented an extra line
    \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselineskip% calculate the length of the padding
    \multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
    \noindent\rule{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}% insert an invisible support strut
\fi%
\par\normalfont}



% V1.6
% added biography without a photo environment
\newenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{%
% Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before
\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade%
% link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump
% to the biography, not the previous section
\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}%
\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}%
\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse%
\fi%
% one more biography
\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
% Make an entry for this name into the table of contents 
\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#1}%
\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize\interlinepenalty500%
\vskip 4\baselineskip plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip%
\parskip=0pt\par%
\noindent\textbf{#1\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\par\normalfont}


% provide the user with some old font commands
% got this from article.cls
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm}
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf}
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt}
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf}
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit}
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl}
\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc}
\DeclareRobustCommand*\cal{\@fontswitch\relax\mathcal}
\DeclareRobustCommand*\mit{\@fontswitch\relax\mathnormal}


% SPECIAL PAPER NOTICE COMMANDS
% 
% holds the special notice text
\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{\relax}
 
% for special papers, like invited papers, the user can do:
% \IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)} before \maketitle
\def\IEEEspecialpapernotice#1{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\sublargesize\textit{#1}\vspace*{1em}}}%
\else%
\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\\*[1.5ex]\sublargesize\textit{#1}}\vspace*{-2ex}}%
\fi}




% PUBLISHER ID COMMANDS
% to insert a publisher's ID footer
% V1.6 \IEEEpubid has been changed so that the change in page size and style
% occurs in \maketitle. \IEEEpubid must now be issued prior to \maketitle
% use \IEEEpubidadjcol as before - in the second column of the title page
% These changes allow \maketitle to take the reduced page height into
% consideration when dynamically setting the space between the author 
% names and the maintext.
%
% the amount the main text is pulled up to make room for the
% publisher's ID footer
% The IEEE uses about 1.3\baselineskip for journals, 
% dynamic title spacing will clean up the fraction
\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{1.3\baselineskip}
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
% for technotes it must be an integer of baselineskip as there can be no
% dynamic title spacing for two column mode technotes (the title is in the
% in first column) and we should maintain an integer number of lines in the
% second column
% There are some examples (such as older issues of "Transactions on
% Information Theory") in which the IEEE really pulls the text off the ID for
% technotes - about 0.55in (or 4\baselineskip). We'll use 2\baselineskip
% and call it even.
\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{2\baselineskip}
\fi

% V1.7 compsoc does not use a pullup
\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{0pt}
\fi

% holds the ID text
\def\@IEEEpubid{\relax}

% flag so \maketitle can tell if \IEEEpubid was called
\newif\if@IEEEusingpubid
\global\@IEEEusingpubidfalse
% issue this command in the page to have the ID at the bottom
% V1.6 use before \maketitle
\def\IEEEpubid#1{\def\@IEEEpubid{#1}\global\@IEEEusingpubidtrue}


% command which will pull up (shorten) the column it is executed in
% to make room for the publisher ID. Place in the second column of
% the title page when using \IEEEpubid
% Is smart enough not to do anything when in single column text or
% if the user hasn't called \IEEEpubid
% currently needed in for the second column of a page with the
% publisher ID. If not needed in future releases, please provide this
% command and define it as \relax for backward compatibility
% v1.6b do not allow command to operate if the peer review option has been 
% selected because \IEEEpubidadjcol will not be on the cover page.
% V1.7 do nothing if compsoc
\def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else
\if@twocolumn\if@IEEEusingpubid\enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}\fi\fi\fi\fi}

% Special thanks to Peter Wilson, Daniel Luecking, and the other
% gurus at comp.text.tex, for helping me to understand how best to
% implement the IEEEpubid command in LaTeX.



%% Lockout some commands under various conditions

% general purpose bit bucket
\newsavebox{\@IEEEtranrubishbin}

% flags to prevent multiple warning messages
\newif\if@IEEEWARNthanks
\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart
\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography
\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto
\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid
\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol
\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership
\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext
\@IEEEWARNthankstrue
\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstarttrue
\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographytrue
\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophototrue
\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidtrue
\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcoltrue
\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershiptrue
\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletexttrue


%% Lockout some commands when in various modes, but allow them to be restored if needed
%%
% save commands which might be locked out
% so that the user can later restore them if needed
\let\@IEEESAVECMDthanks\thanks
\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart\IEEEPARstart
\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography\IEEEbiography
\let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography\endIEEEbiography
\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto\IEEEbiographynophoto
\let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto\endIEEEbiographynophoto
\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid\IEEEpubid
\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol\IEEEpubidadjcol
\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership\IEEEmembership
\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext\IEEEaftertitletext


% disable \IEEEPARstart when in draft mode
% This may have originally been done because the pre-V1.6 drop letter
% algorithm had problems with a non-unity baselinestretch
% At any rate, it seems too formal to have a drop letter in a draft
% paper.
\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** ATTENTION: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart
 is disabled in draft mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse}
\fi
% and for technotes
\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart
 is locked out for technotes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse}
\fi


% lockout unneeded commands when in conference mode
\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
% when locked out, \thanks, \IEEEbiography, \IEEEbiographynophoto, \IEEEpubid,
% \IEEEmembership and \IEEEaftertitletext will all swallow their given text. 
% \IEEEPARstart will output a normal character instead
% warn the user about these commands only once to prevent the console screen
% from filling up with redundant messages
\def\thanks#1{\if@IEEEWARNthanks\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\thanks
 is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNthanksfalse}
\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart
 is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse}


% LaTeX treats environments and commands with optional arguments differently.
% the actual ("internal") command is stored as \\commandname 
% (accessed via \csname\string\commandname\endcsname )
% the "external" command \commandname is a macro with code to determine
% whether or not the optional argument is presented and to provide the 
% default if it is absent. So, in order to save and restore such a command
% we would have to save and restore \\commandname as well. But, if LaTeX
% ever changes the way it names the internal names, the trick would break.
% Instead let us just define a new environment so that the internal
% name can be left undisturbed.
\newenvironment{@IEEEbogusbiography}[2][]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiography
 is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographyfalse%
\setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax}
% and make biography point to our bogus biography
\let\IEEEbiography=\@IEEEbogusbiography
\let\endIEEEbiography=\end@IEEEbogusbiography

\renewenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiographynophoto
 is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophotofalse%
\setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax}

\def\IEEEpubid#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubid 
 is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidfalse}
\def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubidadjcol
 is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcolfalse}
\def\IEEEmembership#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEmembership
 is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershipfalse}
\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEaftertitletext
 is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletextfalse}
\fi


% provide a way to restore the commands that are locked out
\def\IEEEoverridecommandlockouts{%
\typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding command lockouts (line \the\inputlineno).}%
\let\thanks\@IEEESAVECMDthanks%
\let\IEEEPARstart\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart%
\let\IEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography%
\let\endIEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography%
\let\IEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto%
\let\endIEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto%
\let\IEEEpubid\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid%
\let\IEEEpubidadjcol\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol%
\let\IEEEmembership\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership%
\let\IEEEaftertitletext\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext}



% need a backslash character for typeout output
{\catcode`\|=0 \catcode`\\=12
|xdef|@IEEEbackslash{\}}


% hook to allow easy disabling of all legacy warnings
\def\@IEEElegacywarn#1#2{\typeout{** ATTENTION: \@IEEEbackslash #1 is deprecated (line \the\inputlineno).
Use \@IEEEbackslash #2 instead.}}


% provide some legacy IEEEtran commands
\def\IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext{\@IEEElegacywarn{IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}{IEEEtitleabstractindextext}\IEEEtitleabstractindextext}
\def\IEEEdisplaynotcompsoctitleabstractindextext{\@IEEElegacywarn{IEEEdisplaynotcompsoctitleabstractindextext}{IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext}\IEEEdisplaynontitleabstractindextext}
% provide some legacy IEEEtran environments


% V1.8a no more support for these legacy commands
%\def\authorblockA{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockA}{IEEEauthorblockA}\IEEEauthorblockA}
%\def\authorblockN{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockN}{IEEEauthorblockN}\IEEEauthorblockN}
%\def\authorrefmark{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorrefmark}{IEEEauthorrefmark}\IEEEauthorrefmark}
%\def\PARstart{\@IEEElegacywarn{PARstart}{IEEEPARstart}\IEEEPARstart}
%\def\pubid{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubid}{IEEEpubid}\IEEEpubid}
%\def\pubidadjcol{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubidadjcol}{IEEEpubidadjcol}\IEEEpubidadjcol}
%\def\specialpapernotice{\@IEEElegacywarn{specialpapernotice}{IEEEspecialpapernotice}\IEEEspecialpapernotice}
% and environments
%\def\keywords{\@IEEElegacywarn{keywords}{IEEEkeywords}\IEEEkeywords}
%\def\endkeywords{\endIEEEkeywords}
% V1.8 no more support for legacy IED list commands
%\let\labelindent\IEEElabelindent
%\def\calcleftmargin{\@IEEElegacywarn{calcleftmargin}{IEEEcalcleftmargin}\IEEEcalcleftmargin}
%\def\setlabelwidth{\@IEEElegacywarn{setlabelwidth}{IEEEsetlabelwidth}\IEEEsetlabelwidth}
%\def\usemathlabelsep{\@IEEElegacywarn{usemathlabelsep}{IEEEusemathlabelsep}\IEEEusemathlabelsep}
%\def\iedlabeljustifyc{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyc}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyc}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc}
%\def\iedlabeljustifyl{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyl}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyl}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl}
%\def\iedlabeljustifyr{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyr}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyr}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr}
% V1.8 no more support for QED and proof stuff
%\def\QED{\@IEEElegacywarn{QED}{IEEEQED}\IEEEQED}
%\def\QEDclosed{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDclosed}{IEEEQEDclosed}\IEEEQEDclosed}
%\def\QEDopen{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDopen}{IEEEQEDopen}\IEEEQEDopen}
%\AtBeginDocument{\def\proof{\@IEEElegacywarn{proof}{IEEEproof}\IEEEproof}\def\endproof{\endIEEEproof}}
% V1.8 no longer support biography or biographynophoto
%\def\biography{\@IEEElegacywarn{biography}{IEEEbiography}\IEEEbiography}
%\def\biographynophoto{\@IEEElegacywarn{biographynophoto}{IEEEbiographynophoto}\IEEEbiographynophoto}
%\def\endbiography{\endIEEEbiography}
%\def\endbiographynophoto{\endIEEEbiographynophoto}
% V1.7 and later no longer supports \overrideIEEEmargins
%\def\overrideIEEEmargins{%
%\typeout{** WARNING: \string\overrideIEEEmargins \space no longer supported (line \the\inputlineno).}%
%\typeout{** Use the \string\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin, \string\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin \space controls instead.}}

\endinput

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of IEEEtran.cls  %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
% That's all folks!